Technical Specifications

Volume 2 of 4 – Mechanical Works

Juffali Industrial Park – KAEC Saudi Arabia

Contract Documents – Rev. 0

January, 2023
DIVISION 15

MECHANICAL
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 15050 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
SECTION 15070 SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
SECTION 15110 VALVES
SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
SECTION 15160 STORM DRAINAGE
SECTION 15190 FUEL SYSTEM PIPING
SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION (PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER)
SECTION 15320 FIRE PUMPS
SECTION 15325 SPRINKLER SYSTEM
SECTION 15365 FM 200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
SECTION 15375 STANDPIPE AND FIRE HOSE SYSTEM
SECTION 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15450 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 15481 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
SECTION 15510 HYDRONIC PIPING
SECTION 15671 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT
SECTION 15780 PACKAGED AIRCONDITIONING UNIT
SECTION 15784 UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
SECTION 15810 DUCTS
SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15825 DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15830 FANS
SECTION 15850 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SECTION 15930 CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

DIVISION 15 - TABLE OF CONTENTS 1/1

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15010

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. The Work cover the mechanical requirement under Division 15 and shall include but not limited
to the supply, installation, calibration, testing, commissioning, operating and Maintaining the
installation in accordance with the Tender Documents. All works, Materials and equipment not
specifically mentioned but necessary for the completion and operation of the installation shall be
deemed as included in the Scope of the work.

B. All work related to the Civil, Structure, Architecture, and Electrical, shall be, unless specifically
covered under this Division, deemed to be covered under other sections of this specification.

1.2 REFERENCES:

The following abbreviations have been mentioned in the specification:

A. AGA : American Gas Association.

B. AMCA : Air Moving and Conditioning Associations.
C. ANSI : American National Standard Institute.
D. ARI : Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
E. ASA : Acoustical Society of America.
F. ASHRAE : American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
G. ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
H. ASTM : American Society of Testing and Materials.
I. AWWA : American Water Works Association.
J. BS : British Standards.
K. DIN : Deutscher Institute for Normalisierung.
L. FM : Factory Mutual.
M. ISO : International Standardization Organization
N. NBS : National Bureau of standards.
O. NEBB : National Environmental Balancing Bureau
P. NFPA : National Fire Protection Association.
Q. NPC : National Plumbing Code.
R. SASO : Saudi Arabian Standard Organization.
S. SMACNA : Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
T. UPC : Uniform Plumbing Code.
U. UL : Under Writers Laboratories.

1.3 ENGINEERS DRAWINGS:

A. The Engineers drawings are in general, diagrammatic and are not to be scaled. Measurements
are to be made from the bench marks.

B. The contractor shall not construct from the engineers drawings, but should use the approved
shop drawings, for construction.

SECTION 15010 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. Shop drawings should be coordinated with ID, Furniture L/O Architecture, Structure and
Electrical drawings.

B. Shop Drawings shall indicate the exact routing and locations of all piping, ducting and equipment
all in their respective location and according to the dimensions and clearances requirements of
the approved equipment, minimum scale 1:50.

C. Installation shall not start before approval of the shop drawings.

1.5 COORDINATED DRAWINGS:

A. Coordinated drawings shall show major elements, components and systems, detailing their
relationship with each other and with other systems such as the building itself. Indicate locations
where space is limited for installation and where coordination will affect the sequence and flow of
work.

B. Installation shall not start before approval of the coordinated drawings.

1.6 BUILDERS WORK DRAWINGS:

A. The Contractor shall show all penetration in walls, floors, ceilings and the relationship to other
penetration and installations.

B. The size of the openings should be adequate to house the fire/smoke dampers, sleeves for ducts
and pipes and should allow entry removal and operation of approved equipment.

C. Openings in structural element should not be allowed before approval of drawings.

1.7 REFLECTED CEILING DRAWINGS:

A. Should coordinate the lighting, air outlet/inlets, sprinklers, access doors and other items which
have to be mounted on the ceilings.

B. Installation on or termination onto the ceiling should not be allowed before the reflected ceiling
drawings are approved.

1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. A set of shop drawings shall be kept on the site with all site changes marked on the drawings.
These mark-ups are the basis of the “As-Built” drawings.

B. The Installation shall not be covered prior to inspection by the Consultant and to ascertain the
correctness of the record drawings.

SECTION 15010 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 2 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.9 AS - BUILT DRAWINGS:

A. Within two weeks from the inspection of the Works, the Contractor shall submit two copies of the
“As Built Drawings.” reflecting changes made on the record drawings, location of all concealed
and exposed equipment, piping with invert levels Fire, Smoke and volume dampers with tags,
valves with tags, location and materials of underground pipes and invert levels.

B. Upon approval of the “As Built Drawings” the contractor shall submit two sepias and five prints to
the Engineer and two sets of electronic files.

1.10 MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

A. Four maintenance and operation manuals should be submitted and should include the following
information for equipment and systems and as described in the General Terms and Conditions of
the Project.

B. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves,

engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of
replacement parts.

C. Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include startup, break-in and routine and normal
operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown and emergency instructions; and
summer and winter operating instructions.

D. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting: disassembly,

repair and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

E. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

F. Manufacturer’s literature describing each piece of equipment listed in the Equipment Schedule,
giving the unit number, system number, Manufacturer’s Model number and Drawing No. Fan and
pump curves.

G. Control diagrams, as installed.

H. Sequence of operation by the control manufacturer.

I. Wiring diagrams, as installed and color coded, of electrical motor controller connections and
interlock connections of equipment listed in the Equipment Schedules.

J. Diagrammatic location, function and tag numbers of each valve.

K. List of nearest local equipment suppliers.

L. Air balancing test reports on fans and air outlets and setting positions of dampers.

M. Water balance Test report.

SECTION 15010 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 3 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.11 MATERIAL SUBMITTAL:

A. All materials shall be new, free from blemish and defects and bear the labels attesting to the
standard of manufacture.

B. The naming of a manufacture in the specifications by type or reference is intended to establish

the minimum quality and should not be construed that products of other manufacturers of equal
or better standards will not be acceptable.

C. All materials should be submitted for approval prior to purchase, together with comparison sheet
to the specified product or performance data showing deviation from the specification. Unless
deviations are high- lighted and approved as such the approval does not release the contractor
to abide by the specifications.

D. The material submittal shall have adequate engineering data catalogue cuts, brochures, country
of manufacturing and assembly. All the characteristic curves, capacity selection charts, data for
testing and balancing and manufacturer’s installation instructions should be included also, the
submittals should be clear and placed in a binder.

E. Materials shall be delivered in unbroken packages, properly identified, bearing the name, model
number, types, grades, compliance labels and other information needed for identification.
Materials shall be stored on platforms, properly covered, and protected against any damage.

F. Materials shall be supplied from the sources shown on the approved submittals, and any
deviation is not acceptable unless approved by the consultant.

1.12 EQUIPMENT AND MANUAL HANDLING:

A. Equipment (cranes, forklifts, etc.) needed to handle materials should be carefully chosen to avoid
damaging the materials handled, and it is advisable to keep materials in its own packaging till it
reaches its final destination. Also, handlers should comply with manufacturer recommendations.

B. Store equipment with heat or humidity sensitive components in air- conditioned store.

C. Store and handle all equipment and materials strictly to the suppliers recommendations.

1.13 QUALITY CONTROL :

A. The contractor should provide a quality control section on the project and implement quality
control procedure. This procedure shall be to an international standard and should be submitted
for approval.

B. The quality control manager shall keep records of all the quality control. Inspection report.

C. Certified welders only should be allowed to perform welding on the site. The certificate should be
current and accredited by international or national testing authorities for the type of weld to be
performed.

1.14 INSTALLATION:

Sequence, coordinate and integrate the various elements of the mechanical systems material and
equipment and comply with the following requirements.

SECTION 15010 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 4 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Coordinate the installation of required supports sleeves Fire/Smoke damper and other device to
be set in poured in-place concrete.

B. Coordinate entry and positioning of large equipment before closing-in the building.

C. Install systems and equipment to provide the maximum head room and clear space possible.

D. Install equipment to the manufacturer recommendation for operation and serviceability or

replacement.

E. Install systems, material and equipment level and plumb parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components.

F. Connect equipment, pipes and valves for ease of removal and service.

G. Install systems and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems requiring specific slope.

H. Coordinate with utilities company and install the connections to their requirements and approval
and pay for all connection fees.

I. Asbestos materials, joiners or additives shall not be used.

J. Access doors shall be provided in the proper location to access concealed equipment and
materials.

1.15 LABELS AND TAGS :

A. Submit for approval a schedule of equipment and devices to be labeled and tagged with the
proposed material fixing and nomenclature.

B. Attach to or install adjacent to the equipment and major devices labels as per the approved
nomenclature.

B. Tag valves and controls other than equipment and equipment shut-off valves.

1.16 GENERAL GUIDANCE

A. Prepare and start of system:

1. Flush clean equipment and piping and bleed air from the system.

2. Ensure that piping and ductwork are not blocked.

3. Keep valves in the normal operating position.

4. Clean strainers.

5. Open volume damper and fire dampers.

6. Ensure the electrical and control systems are proper and operational.

7. Ensure motors to rotate in the direction indicated.

SECTION 15010 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 5 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

8. Ensure that power is balanced between the multi-phase motors and ensure that the
electrical systems are not overloaded.

9. Ensure that fuel is available for starting generators or boilers.

10. Ensure that boiler flues are not blocked.

11. Ensure piping of different systems are not crossed connected.

12. Ensure that refrigeration equipment are charged with oil and refrigerant.

13. Ensure that rotating equipment are balanced.

14. Ensure that all bearings are lubricated.

15. Ensure that the manufacturer requirements for preparation for start-up and start-up
procedure is adhered to.

16. Ensure that start-up is done in the presence of the manufacturer representative where
called for in the specifications.

1.17 TESTING AND BALANCING.

A Contractor shall hire a reputable Testing and Commissioning Agency for all the Scope of Works
require for Section 15950 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing and submit the pre-qualifications of
Agency for review and approval of the Engineer.

B. Perform testing, balancing and reporting to the procedures contained in NEBB (National
Environmental Balancing Bureau) and “Procedural Standard for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
of Environmental Systems” and to SMACNA’s “HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing”.

C. Prepare a testing, adjusting and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures and submit for approval.

D. Piping: Prepare piping for testing, clean, chemically clean, fill with water, blood, ensure controls
and equipment are operational, produce schematic drawing for balancing with valves and
equipment tag numbers. Log all reading as flow temperature, pressure, power, voltage, phases,
etc. in electrical and controls.

E. Ductwork: Clean, ensure controls and equipment are operational, produce schematic drawing
for balancing shooting equipment reference, balance the air system, ensure fire and smoke
dampers are operational. Take readings.

1.18 TEST REPORT:

A. Submit all test reports including field readings, schematic to engineer Engineer’s approval.

B. Report problems encountered and wherever the balancing was unsatisfactory or system failing
test.

C. Provide testing and balancing warranty that the systems are balanced to optimum performance
capabilities within the design and installation limits.

SECTION 15010 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 6 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.19 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING:

A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of the control manufacturer and any other major
supplier mentioned under the different Sections of the Specifications to train the Employer’s
maintenance staff for a period of up to 5 days, and should familiarize the Employer’s staff for a
period of up to six weeks on all equipment and plant on the Project.

1.20 GUARANTEE :

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the proper operation of the system and acceptable noise and
vibration throughout the guarantee period as described in the General Terms and Conditions of
the Project.

B. Should any equipment, material or installations proved defective, the contractor shall replace the
equipment or material and repair the installation at his own expense.

C. The guarantee on the replaced or repaired defective equipment shall be extended for a period
equal to the guarantee period.

1.21 MAINTENANCE :

A. During the maintenance period the contractor shall promptly attend to problems arising during
operation.

B. Provide a monthly inspection report on the equipment with a check list of actual site readings
certifying that each piece of equipment has been examined and found running as intended and
has been properly maintained as per the manufacturers recommendations. The check list used
should be approved by the manufacturer of the equipment.

1.22 BUILDER’S WORK

This section shall cover, but not limited to, equipment foundations, support, walls/slabs openings for
passage of pipes/ducts, excavation and backfilling, access doors, waterproofing, cleaning and painting.

A. Access Doors.

1. Provide access doors in false ceilings, walls, or other structures, in order to permit proper
access to equipment and fixtures that require maintenance.

B. Cleaning and Painting.

Pipes and ducts should be properly capped during construction to keep the interior clean.

1. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipes, ducts, in order to remove loose mill scale, blisters, sand,
plaster, debris, paint droppings, dirt, oil, grease and any foreign matter.

2. Clean the area to be painted with wire bush, sanding or sand blasting.

3. Prepare the area to be painted as per the paint manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations.

4. Pipes should be painted in accordance with ASME color code; showing type of service,
size and direction of flow. Insulated pipes should be color coded and info stenciled over
the external jacket.

SECTION 15010 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 7 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

5. Damaged equipment surfaces must be restored to their original condition before painting.

6. Paint chosen should be suitable fore each application e.g. hot surfaces need heat
resistant paint.

7. Hangers and supports, including clamps, rods, bolts, nuts, etc. should be painted with two
coats of zinc chromate primer, and where exposed to view, two additional coats of
approved oil paint.

8. Black steel piping, including flanges, bolts, nuts, cast iron valves, valve wheels, and all
ferrous parts and accessories, should be painted with two coats of zinc chromate primer,
and where exposed to view and/or bare, two additional coats of approved oil paint.

9. Ferrous pipes in trenches, shafts, underground or outdoors, including flanges, bolts, nuts,
valves, and all ferrous parts and accessories, should be painted with two coats of zinc
chromate primer, and two coats of heavy bituminous solution paint.

10. Ductwork, where it is visible through registers and grilles, should be painted with one coat
of dull, black, fire resistant paint.

C. Ducts Passing Through Walls and Slabs.

1. Provide proper frames for ducts passing through walls, floors and roofs.

2. Plug both ends during construction.

3. For ducts passing through fire walls and slabs, the intensity of the fire compartmentation
should be preserved.

D. Pipes Passing Through Walls and Slabs.

1. Provide pipe sleeves for pipes passing through walls, floors and roofs. Plug both ends
during construction.

2. Pipes passing through walls and roofs should be in a pipe sleeve having a diameter equal
to two nominal pipes sizes larger than the bare pipe passing through; and, adequate
considerations for pipes with insulation.

3. Sleeves should terminate flush with finished walls and ceilings, but to project 20 mm
above finished floors and 250 mm above finished roof.

4. For pipes passing through fire walls or slabs, the integrity of the fire compartmentation
should be preserved. Refer to Section 15515.

E. Escutcheon Plates.

1. Provide escutcheon plates for all exposed uninsulated pipes passing through walls, floors
and ceilings.

2. Plate materials and size should match the pipe that is to conceal.

3. Plate for pipe passing through sleeve which extend above floor surface, should be of deep
recessed type to conceal the sleeve.

SECTION 15010 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 8 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

F. Equipment Foundations and Supports.

1. Equipment foundations and supports should have the Engineer’s approval.

2. Foundations for heavy equipment at ground level are to be carried independently to solid
ground or rock and isolated from the floor slab with 50 mm thick layer of cork board and
mastic filler to prevent transmission of vibration. Foundations to be 150 mm all around
larger than the equipment base.

3. Provide vibration isolation mounts and position it in accordance with equipment weight
distribution and manufacturer recommendations. Embedded mounts to be placed and
secured during pouring of concrete.

4. Equipment should be leveled and aligned on supports over its entire length and width.

5. Suspended cradles and wall brackets should sustain a load eight times the actual
equipment weight.

G. Excavation and Backfilling. Refer to Section 02200 – EARTHWORKS.

H. Thrust Blocks.

1. Thrust blocks should be provided at bends and junctions for pressurized pipelines.

2. Do not apply any pressure on the thrust blocks until concrete has been cured for at least 3
days.

I. Waterproofing.

1. Openings around ducts/pipes in external walls, roofs and floors should be made watertight
with caulking, caulking fittings, and flashings.

2. Pipes passing thru roofs should be further waterproofed with 2 mm thick lead flashing
fixed to the pipes with a flashing sleeve and extended under the roof waterproofing
membrane 300 mm all round.

1.23 SPARE PARTS:

A. Non consumable spare part required during the maintenance period shall be supplied and
installed free by the Contractor.

B. In addition the Contractor shall provide a price list of manufacturers recommended running spare
parts of five years of operations.

C. Where specified the Contractor should supply maintenance materials as specified under the
respective systems.

D. Where a computer system is provided to monitor and control the plant, the contractor should
supply spare part software to monitor the inventory and ordering of same.

1.24 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION :

A. All electrical installation performed under This Division, shall unless otherwise stated, conform in

SECTION 15010 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 9 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

all respect with the provision and requirements of DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL WORKS.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15010 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 10 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15050

BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishings and installing all basic mechanical piping,
fittings, specialties and related items as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. Materials and methods included in this Section are of a general nature, and apply to most systems
and installations in this Contract. Refer to individual system Section for the respective systems.

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

A120 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses.
A.181 Forged or Rolled Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings and Valves and
Parts for General Service.
B32 Specifications for Solder Metal.
B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube.
D1785 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
D2000 Elastomeric Materials for Automotive Applications.
D2564 Solvent Cement for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
D2665 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and
Fittings.

B. ANSI - American National Standard Institute

A21.100 Gray Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings for Water and Other Liquids.
A21.10A Supplement to ANSI A21.10.
A112.21.1 Floor Drains.
A112.26.1 Water Hammer Arrestors.
B.21 Pipe Threads (Except Dry Seal).
B16.3 Malleable-Iron Screwed Fittings, 150 and 300 Pound.
B16.4 Cast-Iron Screwed Fittings, 125 and 250 Pound.
B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-welded Fittings.
B.16.12 Cast-iron Threaded Drainage Fittings.
B16.18 Cast Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
B16.22 Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.
B16.23 Cast Bronze Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
B16.25 Butt-welded Ends.
B16.29 Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage
Fittings.
B31.3 Code for Pressure Piping.
B31.5 Code for Refrigerant Piping.

C. ASME - American Society for Mechanical Engineers

A40.8 National Plumbing Code.
SECTION 1X Welded and Brazing and Pressure Vessel qualifications Code.

D. AWWA - American Water Works Association

C110 Standard for Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron fittings, 2 In. through 48 In., for
Water and other Liquids. Include AWWA C110A (ANSI A21.10A).
C111 Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or
Sand Lined Molds for Water and other Liquids.

E. AWS - American Welding Society

A5.1 Mild Steel Covered Arc - Welded Electrodes.

F. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry

SP Butterfly Valves.

G. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standard Organization:

SASO - 14 Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized Plastic.

SECTION 15050 – BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 1 / 11

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

H. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or
equivalent authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabricated specialties, indicating details of fabrication, materials and
method of support.

B. Product Data and Samples: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation
instruction, and dimensioned drawings for each type of manufactured piping specialty. Submit
samples as may be required by the Engineer.

C. Welder's Certificates: Submit for all welders on the Project as per AWS Standards.

1.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

Refer to individual Section of the Specifications.

1.5 WARRANTY:

Refer to individual Section of the Specifications.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

Refer to individual Section of the Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s name s mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 PIPES AND FITTINGS:

A. Refer to the individual piping system Sections of DIVISION 15 for specifications on piping and
fittings relative to that particular system.

B. Brazing Materials: Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for
brazing filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined.

C. Soldering Materials: Refer to individual piping system specifications for solder appropriate for the
materials being joined.

D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast iron flanges and raised-
face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in which installed
and which conform to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B16.20, or B16.21). Provide
materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of the fluid
being carried.

2.3 VALVES:

A. Refer to Section 15110 – VALVES

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES:

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in

service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for each
service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by the Contractor to comply
with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate
with pipe, tube and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is
Contractor's option.

B. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split ring escutcheon, with set screw.
Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipes
insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls or ceilings.

C. Unions:

SECTION 15050 – BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 2 / 11

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Unions in steel pipe shall be malleable iron and have female pattern, brass to iron seat
and ground joint. Unions shall be rated for minimum of 1.0 MPa water working pressure.

2. Unions in copper piping shall be cast bronze, female pattern, brass to brass seat and
ground joint, threaded end connections for 50 mm and smaller, and flanged connections
for larger than 50 mm. Unions shall be rated for minimum of 1.0 MPa water working
pressure.

D. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe
materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar
metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.

E. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: Electroplated steel or brass nipple, with an insert and non-corrosive,
thermoplastic lining.

F. Strainers: Strainers shall be Y-pattern having ASTM B61 bronze body, full line size of connecting
piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Strainers shall have Type 304 stainless steel
screens and tapped blow-off plug. Strainers shall be rated for 1.5 MPa water working pressure.

G. Thermometers:

General: Thermometers with separable wells, straight or angle-mounted as required and installed
in piping systems to be easily read. Provide extension necks where required to clear insulation.
Separable sockets in ferrous piping systems Type 316 stainless steel and those installed in non-
ferrous systems brass or bronze. Install thermometers where easily read from floor or catwalk.
Install wells in oversized tees in part of waterflow to be measured so that are around well is same
as adjacent pipe. Install where indicated and as follows:

1. Supply and return of each heat exchanger and domestic water heater.

2. In supply and return main of each chilled water coil assembly at fan systems.

3. Inlet and outlet of each chiller condenser, evaporator and auxiliary condenser.

Temperature ranges shall be within 6°C (10°F) of the following. Submittal shall list specific range
proposed for each of the following applications.

1. Chilled Water -18 to 38°C

(0 to 100°F)
with 1-degree divisions

2. Condenser Water -1 to +54°C

(30 to 130°F) with
-1 degree divisions

Thermometer Accuracy: Manufacturer shall submit for each thermometer type a certificate of
accuracy to one scale division. Thermometers suspected by the

Engineer of being inaccurate shall be tested and replaced with accurate.

H. Pressure Gages:

a. General:

Pressure gages shall be Grade A, accurate within 1/2 percent of scale range, Bourdon
tube spring type, with 110 mm (4 - 1/2 in.) dials (unless otherwise indicated), and with
recalibrating screws. Gages shall have plain cases with screwed rings and be finished
in black enamel. Each gage installed with necessary piping ,including shutoff needle
valve. Provide pressure snubber on each water or air pressure gage. Provide pigtail on
each steam gage. Do not install gages until systems are cleaned. Install gages where
they may be easily read from floor or catwalk. All pressure gages shall read PASCALS.

b. Pressure: Pressure gage ranges shall be such that position of pointer during normal
operation will be 50 percent of dial range.

c. Location:

Provide pressure gages where indicated and as follows:

1. High and low sides of pressure regulating valves.

SECTION 15050 – BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 3 / 11

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2. At compression tanks.
3. Ahead of each inlet connection to cooling water.
4. At supply and return connections to each evaporator and condenser for chiller.

d. Tees and Gage Cocks:

Provide tees and gage cocks where indicated.

e. Manufacturer:

Gages manufactured by “Ashcroft”, Marsh Instrument Co., or H.O Trerice, equal to

Marsh’s “Mastergauge”. Gage needle valve shall be Anderson Greenwood & Co. type H-
5 with teflon packaging. Trerice 872 Series pressure snubber with brass or stainless
steel body suitable for application. All pressure gages will read in Pascals.

I. Pressure and Temperature Plugs:

a. General:

Pressure and temperature plugs shall be of test plug type with built-in valve core,
designed to receive a probe type thermometer or pressure gage adapter. All pressure
gauges shall read PASCALS.

b. Test Plug:

For each pressure and temperature plug indicated, provide a brass test plug with
threaded protection cap, 13 mm (1/2 in.) male pipe size threads with valve core material
as recommended by manufacturer for the intended service, rated at 6.9 Mpa (1000 psig)
and temperature.

c. Thermometers:

1. Bimetal thermometers with a stainless steel stem 3.2 mm (1/8 in.) diameter by
130 mm (5 in.) long, protective case, means of recalibration, accuracy of 1
percent of scale range, with the following scale ranges.

a. Chilled water: 4 to 49°C (39 to 120°F)

b. Heating Water: -18 to +104°C (0 to 219°F)

2. Pressure gate adaptor and needle guard.

Plug Installation: Pressure and temperature plugs shall be installed so
thermometer stem can be immersed to minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) For pipes
sized less than 50 mm (2 in.), install test plug in tee so stem can be inserted
axially into pipe. Install to be easily read from floor to catwalk.

Plug Locations: Pressure plugs shall be provided where indicated and as

follows:

1. At each chilled water coil supply and return connection, and for
multiple coil assemblies, on common chilled water return from coil
assembly.

2. On heating water and chilled water branch connections.

3. On each branch connection to each three-way automatic control valve.

J. Manual Air Vent: Manual air vents shall be 20 mm gate valves or manual air valves.

K. Automatic Air Vents: Automatic air vents shall have a cast iron body and cap, asbestos gaskets,
heat treated chrome steel valve and valve seat for purpose of hardness and wear-resistant seats,
stainless steel float, 20 mm NPT inlet connection, and 6 mm NPT discharge connection. The vent
is to be designed for an operating pressure of 1034 kpa.

L. Manual Drains: Manual drains shall be of gate valves.

M. Air Separators: Air separators shall have flanged tangential inlet and outlet connections, internal
perforated stainless steel air collector tube, and be constructed in accordance with ASME Boiler
and pressure vessel code and stamped for 862 kpa working pressure. A blow down connection
with a gate valve shall be provided.

SECTION 15050 – BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 4 / 11

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

N. Pressure Relief Valves: Pressure relief valve shall be ASME LABELED for relieving pressure and
rated as indicated on the Contract drawings, low blow-down differential and valve seat and all
moving parts exposed to the fluid shall be of non-ferrous material.

The valves shall be diaphragm operated, the seats and working parts exposed to the fluid shall be
of noncorrosive material. Fluid discharge shall not enter the relief chambers. Reducing valve
setting shall be 83 kpa but can be adjusted from 55 to 172 kpa. The reducing valve shall contain
a removable strainer and anti-syphon check valve. Relief valve setting shall be factory set at 206
kpa.

The compression tank shall be constructed in compliance with ASME boiler and pressure vessel
codes and nameplated for 1040 kpa working pressure. Tank capacity shall be of the size shown
on the contract drawings and furnished with gauge glass tapping.

The air control tank fitting shall be constructed for 1040 kpa working pressure and shall include a
manual vent.

P. Water Hammer Arrestors: Provide Josam or approved equal stainless steel water hammer
arrestors on both cold and hot waterlines, install in an upright position at all quick closing valves.
Size in accordance with the following plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard No. WH201. P.D.I
ratings.

WHA-A Josam No. 75001 or 1485-1 for 1 to 11 fixture units.

WHB-B Josam No. 75002 or 1485-2 for 12 to 32 fixture units.

WHA-C Josam No. 75003 or 1485-3 for 33 to 60 fixture units.

WHA-D Josam No. 75004 or 1485-4 for 61 to 113 fixture units.

Q. Backflow Preventers: Plumbing fixtures, faucets with hose connections, and all other equipment
having plumbing connections shall have their water supplies protected against all possible back
siphonage by approved backflow prevention devices as specified with equipment or required by
the Plumbing Code. Backflow preventers shall be approved by the Consultant.

2.5 SLEEVES

Sheet Metal Sleeves: 10 gage, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

Steel Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A53, Grade A.

Plastic Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe.

Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links
shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure
plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and
electrical insulation.

All pipes penetrating through fire walls shall be sealed with fire resistant material.

2.6 PAINTING:

All equipment provided have a factory applied finish coat of enamel paint. Equipment surfaces that are
damaged in shipment or in Site and that have rusted or corroded in storage or in place shall be restored to
their original condition by cleaning and painting as directed by the Engineer.

All unfinished surfaces shall be painted as directed by the Engineer to present a clean and pleasing
appearance.

All black steel pipes and fittings including flanges, bolts, cast-iron valves and accessories, valve-wheels,
etc.., shall be painted with two-coat of zinc chromate primer irrespective of whether they will or will not be
insulated. Bare black steel pipes, fittings on cast-iron accessories exposed to view shall be further painted
with two-coat of oil paint of color as directed by the Engineer.

All steel and ironwork such as hangers, supports, clamps, rods, bolts and nuts, etc..., shall be painted with
two coat of zinc chromate primer and where exposed to view with (2) two additional coats of oil paint of
color as directed by the Engineer.

SECTION 15050 – BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 5 / 11

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

All black steel piping run-in trenches, shafts, exposed on roots, underground or embedded in concrete or in
other fill, including flanges, supports, clamps, bolts, valves and all iron and steel parts shall be painted with
two-coat of zinc chromate primer and two-coat of heavy bituminous solution paint.

SECTION 15050 – BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 6 / 11

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Paint shall not be applied except on clean, dry surfaces. Surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned by wire
brushing and the use of a cleaning solution. No painting shall be done on damp or frosty surfaces in wet,
foggy or freezing weather.

Before any steel or ironwork is painted all voids and irregularities shall be filled with a suitable and
approved compound.

All paint used shall be of the best grade and specially suited for the application. Paint to be used on hot
surfaces shall be of the heat-resistant type.

Paint shall be delivered to the Site in the original sealed containers and shall be applied in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions. The paint shall be evenly spread and well brushed out to avoid drops, runs
or sags.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL PIPING AND INSTALLATIONS:

A. General: Installation instructions contained in this Section pertain to most systems. For
specific requirements for installation of each system, refer to individual Specifications
Sections.

B. Preparation: Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of
steel pipe. Remove scales, slag, dirt, and debris for both inside and outside of piping
and fittings before assembly.

C. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate the general location and
arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into
consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Refer to individual system
specifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals.

D. Piping:

1. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above
ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated otherwise.

2. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to
permit proper insulation applications.

3. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal or bent piping
will not be permitted.

4. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, etc. where possible and such that any
removable ceiling panels may be removed for access above ceilings.

5. Protect all piping from entrance of dirt or other foreign materials during the
construction period. At the completion of the Project, all diet and foreign matter
in piping shall be removed completely.

6. Piping passing through exterior building walls shall be caulked weather tight.

7. Provide drain lines from all relief valves and condensate pans, and run drain line
full size to the nearest floor or equipment drain.

8. All water piping shall have drain valves at low points in mains, risers, and
branch lines; and same shall be provide with 10 mm drain valve with threaded
hose connection.

9. Water piping shall be securely anchored to insure proper direction of expansion

and contraction.

10. Expansion joints shall be provided as indicated and required.

11. Verify existing grades, inverts and topographic conditions prior to any trenching,
excavation or installations. In the event existing conditions prevent installation
in accordance with contract documents, immediately notify the Engineer for a
decision.

SECTION 15050 – BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 7 / 11

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

12. Horizontal piping shall slope uniformly without sags or humps to provide for
complete drainage of systems and elimination of air.

13. High points in closed piping systems shall be vented by automatic or manual air
vents. Drainage piping shall slope as required by Code or as indicated. Where
applicable, steam and condensate shall slope down in direction of flow 12 mm
per 500 mm unless otherwise indicated. Slope water piping up in the direction
of flow 12 mm per 500 mm.

14. Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site, worked
into place without springing or forcing, and shall clear all windows, doors and
other openings. Cutting or other weakening of building structure to facilitate
piping installation is not permitted. Install to permit free expansion and
contraction without damage.

15. Swing joists at run outs to equipment and risers. Provide expansion joints at all
other points for flexible piping systems.

16. Drain piping from pump glands, relief valves, condensate drain pans, etc. shall
discharge into open sight drains, floor drains, or other acceptable collection
points terminating the drain line with a 50 mm minimum air gap and plain end
(unthreaded) pipe.

17. Provide necessary temporary connections, valves, oversize flushing

connections, pump, etc. as required to properly clean and test systems.

18. Coordinate piping installation with duct work, structure, lighting, electrical
conduit, and all other materials and equipment.

19. Use flexible pipe connections for all inlet and discharge final connections to
pumps (except in line pumps) and other vibration producing equipment.

20. Provide flanges on all valves, apparatus, and equipment having 60 mm and
larger connections.

21. Reduction in pipe sizes (except in drainage pipe) shall be made using eccentric
reducer couplings installed with the level side upon water piping and
condensate piping and level side down on all stems.

22. Provide unions adjacent to each valve, and at the final connection to each piece
of equipment or plumbing fixture having 50 mm and smaller connections and
where otherwise indicated.

23. Wherever wells are installed in piping for thermometers, pressure gages,
probes, etc., pipe diameter shall be increased by one pipe size to accommodate
same.

24. Provide water hammer arrestors at the top of all hot and cold domestic water
risers, at the end of each header in utility spaces, at the end of each branch line,
and at the top of the branches to batteries of two or more fixtures. Provide
shock absorbers at each solenoid valve or piece of equipment that has a quick
closing type valve. The arrestors should always be installed so that there is an
unobstructed shock path to the arrestor. Arrestor should be placed as near to
the source of shock as possible. Water hammer arrestors shall be sized as per
manufacturer’s recommendation on the basis of number of fixtures connected to
the cold/hot water supply line.

E. Valves and Specialties:

1. Valves shall be installed where indicated and relief valves shall have a relieving
capacity of not less than the rated output of the equipment. Relief shall be
piped full size, without shutoff devices in line, to the nearest floor drain.

2. Strainers shall be installed ahead of each control valve, pressure reducing and
regulating valves, solenoid valves, etc., and equipment as indicated.

3. Floor drawings and flow diagrams are intended to be complimentary since not
all valves can be shown on the floor plans. In general, flow diagrams and
details show valve arrangement and floor plans show locations when possible.

SECTION 15050 – BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 8 / 11

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

4. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections and take-offs
from mains. Use commercially available fittings for all changes in direction and
branch connections having changes in pipe sizes of one pipe size.

5. All water valves which regulate flow shall be globe, plug, ball or butterfly type,
and valves that are either "open" or "closed" shall be gate, ball or butterfly type
as indicated.

6. Provide shut-off valves in each supply branch from mains and at end supply
connection to equipment; provide a balance valve at each return branch to
mains and at each return connection from equipment.

7. Connect dissimilar piping materials using dielectric unions or installing flanges.

F. Joints:

1. Any leaking joints shall be completely disassembled and remade with new
materials.

2. Ends of all copper tubing and the interior of the cup of the fitting shall be
thoroughly cleaned and polished prior to the application of the flux and solder.
The flux shall be used as a substitute for proper joint preparation.

3. All pipes shall be carefully reamed. Threaded pipes shall have full length clean
cut threads.

4. All sockets and pipe ends of PVC shall be cleaned, solvent cement applied for
full circumferential cover.

3.2 SLEEVES AND SEALING:

A. General:

1. Provide sleeves for all pipes and ductwork passing through floors, walls, partitions,
concrete beams, girders, and any other building construction, types as scheduled below,
of adequate diameter to allow minimum of 19 mm (3/4 in.) clearance all around between
sleeve and pipe or ductwork. When pipe or ductwork is insulated, insulation shall pass
continuously through sleeve with 19 mm (3/4 in.) clearance between insulation and
sleeve.

2. Lay out work prior to concrete forming. Do all cutting and patching required. Reinforce
sleeves to prevent collapse during forming and pouring.

3. All floor sleeves shall extend 25 mm (1 in.) above finished floor except through
mechanical equipment room floors and shafts where sleeves shall extend 50 mm (2 in.)
above finished floor level. Sleeves through roof shall extend 200 mm (8 in.) above roof.
Wall sleeves flush with face of wall unless otherwise indicated. Waste stacks using
carriers shall have sleeves flush with floor and sealed.

4. Sleeves shall permit free thermal expansion of pipe without binding or contact with
structure.

5. Do not support pipes by resting pipe clamps on floor sleeves. Supplementary members
shall be provided so pipes are floor supported.

6. Special sleeves detailed as indicated shall take precedence over this section.

B. Pipe Sleeves:

1. Galvanized Schedule 40 Steel Pipe:

a. Concrete or masonry walls and concrete bases.

b. Beams with poured concrete fireproofing.
c. Concrete floors and mechanical equipment room floors.
d. Concrete floors with metal under deck (tack weld to deck).

2. 1.31 mm (18 gage) Galvanized Steel:

a. Plaster or drywall.
b. Beams or girders with sprayed-on fireproofing (tack weld or beam on girder).

SECTION 15050 – BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 9 / 11

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

c. Air plenums.

3. Wade W-8700 or approved equal:

Waterproof membrane floors, walls, concrete pits, foundation walls, etc.

C. Duct Sleeves:

As follows unless otherwise indicated. Sleeves specified or indicated at fire dampered

penetrations shall take precedence over this Section.

1. 1.31 mm (18 gage) Galvanized Steel:

a. Plaster or drywall.
b. Concrete floors and mechanical equipment room floors.
c. Concrete floors with metal under deck (tack weld to deck).
d. Air plenums.

2. As detailed:

Waterproof membrane floors.

D. Sealing of Sleeves:

1. Waterproof Sleeves in Floors and Walls:

Calk space between pipe and sleeves in exterior walls, foundation walls, and pits etc.,
watertight using oakum and lead or Thunder Line Corporation link seal modular wall and
casing seal.

2. All Other Sleeves:

Except through beams or girders with sprayed-on fireproofing, sleeves shall be packed
with asbestos rope and sealed with Tremco Fire Resistive Joint Sealing System, Semco
PR855 or approved equal.

E. Trim Plates:

On all exposed pipes and ducts passing through floors, walls, partitions, plaster furring, etc.,
provide 25 mm (1 in.) split-type steel plates at visible sides of openings. In finished rooms, plates
prime-coated; in unfinished rooms, plates chrome-plated. Dry standpipes and fire sprinkler risers
need no plates. Where riser clamps are used no plates required.

3.03 CLEANING:

A. General:

Each system of piping and ductwork shall be cleaned as hereinafter specified, prior to being
placed in service and before operating tests are performed.

B. Potable and Non-Potable Water Piping:

All domestic water distribution systems, including those for cold water and hot water systems,
shall be flushed. Potable water piping shall be chlorinated in accordance with AWWA
requirements.

C. Heating Hot Water, Chilled Water, Condenser Water, and Miscellaneous Mechanical System
Water Piping:

Clean system solution of one of the following: 0.5 kg (1 lb), trisodium phosphate for each 0.18 m 3
(50 gal) in system, one pound sodium carbonate for each 0.11 m 3 (30 gal) in system or one
pound sodium hydroxide for each 0.18 m 3 (50 gal) in system. Fill, vent, and circulate for 8 hours,
allowing temperature to reach design temperature in hot water piping or 49°C (120°F) for chilled
and condenser water. Drain, clean strainers, and refill with fresh water. Systems shall again be
operated at design temperature 49°C (120°F) for 4 hours and sample of water from each system
tested with Hydrion paper. Paper shall indicate pH between 7 to 8. Sampling and testing done
in presence of the Engineer, and results shall be to his satisfaction. Additional cleaner shall be
added necessary to obtain PH reading between 7 and 8 clean strainers and boiler fittings.

D. Refrigerant Piping:

SECTION 15050 – BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 10 / 11

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Blow clear of free moisture and foreign matter with cylinder water-pumped compressed air or
nitrogen. Purge with refrigerant before placing in service.

E. Ductwork:

Remove debris and trash from ductwork, fan coil units, induction units, all air-handling
equipment. Vacuum clean fan housing, plenums, coils and ducts.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 15050 – BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 11 / 11

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15060

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes pipe and equipment supports, hangers, anchors, bases sleeves and the sealing of
work to adjacent construction.

B Related Sections:

1. Section 03100 – Concrete Forms and Accessories: Execution requirements for placement
of inserts, sleeves, in concrete forms specified by this section.

2. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of

concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A ASME B31.1 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Power Piping

B ASME B31.5 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Refrigeration Piping

C ASME B31.9 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Building Services Piping

D ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

E MSS SP58 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Pipe
Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

F MSS SP69 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Pipe
Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

G MSS SP89 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Pipe
Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

H NFPA 13 (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

I The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.

C Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

D Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

E Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.

F Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Perform Work in accordance with public code for piping support and in conformance with NFPA 13
and 14 for support of sprinkler piping and standpipes.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented experience.

B Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.

SECTION 15060 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.8 WARRANTY

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide one year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A Fire Protection Piping:

1. Conform to NFPA 13.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 13 to 38 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 75 mm: Cast iron hooks.

6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.

7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete
pier or steel support.

9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon-steel adjustable ring, copper plated.

B Plumbing Piping - DWV:

1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89,.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 13 to 38 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 75 mm: Cast iron hook.

6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.

7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete
pier or steel support.

C Plumbing Piping - Water:

SECTION 15060 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 2/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89,.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 13 to 38 mm: Malleable iron, Carbon steel,, adjustable swivel,
split ring.

3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 50 to 100 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double
hanger.

6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Steel channels with
welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.

8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 76 mm: Cast iron hook.

9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.

10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought
steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.

11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange,
and concrete pier or steel support.

13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 100 mm: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut,
nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand,
steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.

15. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring.

D Hydronic Piping:

1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89,.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 13 to 38 mm: Carbon steel,, adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 50 to 100 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double
hanger.

6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Steel channels with
welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.

8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 76 mm: Cast iron hooks.

9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.

10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought
steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.

11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

SECTION 15060 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 3/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches (100 mm): Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,
lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand,
steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.

15. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon steel ring.

E Refrigerant Piping:

1. Conform to ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89,.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 13 to 38 mm: Carbon steel,, adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 75 mm: Cast iron hook.

6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.

7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete
pier or steel support.

9. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated carbon-steel ring.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded.

2.4 INSERTS

A Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized, steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection
with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit
threaded hanger rods.

2.5 FLASHING

A Metal Flashing: 0.5 mm thick galvanized steel.

B Metal Counter flashing: 0.8 mm thick galvanized steel.

C Lead Flashing:

1. Waterproofing: 24.5 kg/sq m sheet lead

2. Soundproofing: 5 kg/sq m sheet lead.

D Flexible Flashing: 1.2mm thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.

2.6 EQUIPMENT CURBS

A Fabrication: Welded 1.2 mm galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 75mm cant, variable step to
match root insulation,, 38 mm thick insulation,, factory installed wood nailer.

2.7 SLEEVES

A Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 1.2 mm thick galvanized steel.

B Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors:
Steel pipe or 1.2 mm thick galvanized steel.

C Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing:
Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed ,refer to Section 07270,.

D Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

SECTION 15060 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 4/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

E Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.

F Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible ; refer to Section 07270,.

G Sealant: Acrylic; refer to Section 07900.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.2 INSERTS

A Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced
concrete beams.

C Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches (100
mm).

D Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with
recessed square steel plate and nut above, flush with top of, recessed into and grouted flush
with, slab.

3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

B Install hangers to provide minimum 13 mm space between finished covering and adjacent work.

C Place hangers within 300 mm of each horizontal elbow.

D Use hangers with 38 mm minimum vertical adjustment.

E Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 1.5 m maximum spacing between
hangers.

F Support vertical piping at every other, floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

G Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers.

H Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

J Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping, sheet lead packing between
hanger or support and piping,.

L Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

M Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09900., Hangers and supports
located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

3.4 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 87 mm thick and extending 150 mm beyond
supported equipment. Refer to Section 03300.

B Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.

C Construct supports of steel members, Steel pipe and fittings,. Brace and fasten with flanges
bolted to structure.

D Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

3.5 FLASHING

SECTION 15060 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 5/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Provide flexible flashing and metal Counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather
or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 75 mm minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked
25 mm minimum into hub, 200 mm minimum clear on sides with 600 x 600 mm sheet size. For
pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter-flash, and seal.

C Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 250 mm clear on sides with
minimum 910 x 910 mm sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.

D Seal floor, shower, mop sink, and all types of drains watertight to adjacent materials.

E Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms for sound
control.

F Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 350 mm minimum high above roofing surface. Flash
and counter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach Counter flashing mechanical equipment
and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.

G Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof
jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.

3.6 SLEEVES

A Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

B Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for
continuous insulation wrapping.

C Extend sleeves through floors 25 mm above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

D Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct
and adjacent work with stuffing, fire stopping, insulation and caulk airtight,. Provide close fitting
metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

E Install chrome plated steel, plastic, stainless steel, escutcheons at finished surfaces.

3.7 SCHEDULES

PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING DIAMETER

(mm) (m) (mm)

12 to 32 2 9
38 to 50 3 9
62 to 75 3 13
100 to 150 3 15
200 to 300 4.25 22
350 and over 6 25
pvc all sizes 1.8 9
C.I. Bell and
Spigot (or No-Hub) 1.5 110

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15060 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 6/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15070

SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes inertia bases, vibration isolation, ductwork lagging, acoustical louvers and sound
control from mechanical equipment

B Related Sections:

1. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of

isolators in floating floor slabs specified by this section and, product requirements for
concrete for placement by this section.

2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Product requirements for joint sealers specified for
placement by this section

3. Section 15060 – Hangers and Supports

4. Section 15125 – Piping Specialties: Product requirements for Supports, anchors and
piping expansion compensation for placement by this section.

5. Section 15810 – Ducts

6. Section 15820 – Duct Accessories: Product requirements for both solid and flexible duct
connectors for duct silencers specified for placement by this section.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment and other equipments over 0.35 kW, plus
connected piping and ductwork.

B Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as indicated.

1. Basement, Under 15 kw

a) Under 400 rpm: 50mm

b) 400 - 600 rpm: 25mm

c) 600 - 800 rpm: 12mm

d) 800 - 900 rpm: 5mm

e) 1100 - 1500 rpm: 4mm

f) Over 1500 rpm: 3mm

2. Basement, Over 15 kw

a) Under 400 rpm: 90mm

b) 400 - 600 rpm: 50mm

c) 600 - 800 rpm: 25mm

d) 800 - 900 rpm: 12mm

e) 1100 - 1500 rpm: 5mm

f) Over 1500 rpm: 4mm

3. Upper Floors, Normal

SECTION 15070 – SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 1/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

a) Under 400 rpm: 120mm

b) 400 - 600 rpm: 90mm

c) 600 - 800 rpm: 50mm

d) 800 - 900 rpm: 25mm

e) 1100 - 1500 rpm: 12mm

f) Over 1500 rpm: 5mm

4. Upper Floors, Critical

a) Under 400 rpm: 150mm

b) 400 - 600 rpm: 120mm

c) 600 - 800 rpm: 90mm

d) 800 - 900 rpm: 50mm

e) 1100 - 1500 rpm: 25mm

f) Over 1500 rpm: 12mm

C Consider upper floor locations critical unless otherwise indicated.

D Use concrete inertia bases for fans having static pressure in excess of 0.85 kPA or motors in
excess of 30 kW, and on base mounted pumps over 7.5 kW.

E Maintain sound level of spaces at levels not to exceed those listed below by utilizing acoustical
devices.

F Maintain rooms at maximum sound levels, in Noise Criteria (NC) as defined by ASHRAE
Handbook.

G The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Shop Drawings: Indicate inertia bases and locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic load
on each. Indicate assembly, materials, thickness, dimensional data, pressure losses, acoustical
performance, layout, and connection details for sound attenuation products fabricated for this
project.

C Product Data: Submit schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each. Provide
catalog information indicating, materials, dimensional data, pressure losses, and acoustical
performance for standard sound attenuation products.

D Design Data: Provide engineering calculations maximum room sound levels are not exceeded.

E Test Reports: Indicate acoustic housings meet or exceed specified sound transmission loss values.

F Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and setting dimensions. Indicate
installation requirements that maintain integrity of sound isolation.

G Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that isolators meet or exceed specified requirements.

H Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate sound isolation installation is complete and in accordance
with instructions.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

SECTION 15070 – SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 2/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Perform Work in accordance with recommendations of ASHRAE 68.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented, experience.

B Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented, experience approved by manufacturer,.

C Design application of duct silencers and acoustic housings under direct supervision of a
professional engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the place where the
Project is located.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.9 WARRANTY

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide five years manufacturer warranty for bases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 INERTIA BASES

A Structural Bases:

1. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and to

transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers.

2. Construction: Welded structural steel with gusset brackets, supporting equipment and
motor with motor slide rails.

B Concrete Inertia Bases:

1. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment.

2. Construction: Structured steel channel perimeter frame, with gusset brackets and anchor
bolts, adequately reinforced, concrete filled.

3. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base.

4. Concrete: Reinforced 20.7 mPa concrete.

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A Open Spring Isolators:

1. Spring Isolators:

a) For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and
neoprene coated springs.

b) Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

SECTION 15070 – SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 3/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working
deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection.

3. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 6 mm thick neoprene sound pads,
and zinc chromate plated hardware.

4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 1.2 mm; meet requirements for neoprene pad
isolators.

B Restrained Spring Isolators:

1. Spring Isolators:

a) For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and
neoprene coated springs.

b) Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working
deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection.

3. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 6 mm thick neoprene sound pads,
and zinc chromate plated hardware.

4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 1.2 mm; meet requirements for neoprene pad
isolators.

5. Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops.

C Closed Spring Isolators:

1. Spring Isolators:

a) For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and
neoprene coated springs.

b) Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber
stabilizers.

3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working
deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection.

4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad
isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 7 mm clearance.

D Restrained Closed Spring Isolators:

1. Spring Isolators:

a) For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and
neoprene coated springs.

b) Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber
stabilizers.

3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working
deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection.

4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad
isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 7 mm clearance and limit stops.

E Spring Hanger:

1. Spring Isolators:

SECTION 15070 – SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 4/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

a) For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and
neoprene coated springs.

b) Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.

2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working
deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection.

3. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad
isolators, rubber hanger with threaded insert,.

4. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment.

F Neoprene Pad Isolators:

1. Rubber or neoprene-waffle pads.

a) 30 durometer.

b) Minimum 13 mm thick.

c) Maximum loading 275 kPa.

d) Height of ribs shall not exceed 0.7 times width.

2. Configuration: Single layer., 13 mm thick waffle pads bonded each side of 6 mm thick
steel plate.,

G Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 13 mm deflection with threaded insert.

H Glass Fiber Pads: Neoprene jacketed pre-compressed molded glass fiber.

2.4 DUCT SILENCERS

A Description: Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill material, and inner
casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar construction. Fabricate in
accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

B Configuration: Rectangular with lined splitters with radius nose and contoured tails, modular to
dimension required to meet the requirednoise level.

C Materials:

1. Outer Casing: Minimum 0.9 mm thick galvanized steel stiffened as required, with welded
seams, 50 mm long, 2.9 mm slip joints on both ends.

2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 0.6 mm thick perforated galvanized steel.

3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 64 kg/cu m density.

4. Fill Liner: 0.0254 mm Mylar film.

2.5 ACOUSTIC TREATMENT OF GENERATOR ROOM

Contractor shall provide complete acoustic treatment for Generator Building and submit detailed technical
proposal with calculations based on the following.

A. Noise level from the Generator Building shall not exceed max 78 NC at any location 1 meter from
the Generator Building.

B. Generator set shall be provided with critical type silencer.

C. All doors and windows shall be sound proof with appropriate acoustic ratings.

D. Acoustic lining shall be provided in the inner surface of walls in the generator room.

E. Outdoor air intakes and exhausts shall be provided with sound attenuators, sized based on Engine
noise levels.

SECTION 15070 – SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 5/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

F. Radiator fans shall be upgraded for addition static due to sound attenuators, or additional intake
booster fans shall be provided.

G. Acoustic proposal shall include detailed calculations, method statement, installation details, and
testing and commissioning procedures, and shall be fully coordinated with Genset Supplier /
Manufacturer, before submitting for the review and approval of the Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Verify that all equipment, ductwork and piping that is installed before work in this section begins is
as shown on the Project drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A Install isolation for motor driven equipment.

1. Bases:

2. Set steel bases for 25 mm clearance between housekeeping pad and base.

3. Set concrete inertia bases for 50 mm clearance between housekeeping pad and base.

4. Adjust equipment level.

B Install spring hangers without binding.

C On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.

D Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from
installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is
applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.

E Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 1.5 kPa static pressure, and on
hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.

F Support piping connections to isolated equipment resiliently to nearest flexible pipe connector as
follows:

1. Up to 100 mm Diameter: First three points of support.

2. 125 to 200 mm Diameter: First four points of support.

3. 250 mm Diameter and Over: First six points of support.

4. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 25 mm static deflection or
static deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 25 mm
static deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.

G Connect wiring to isolated equipment with flexible hanging loop.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A Section 01700 - Quality Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections.

C After start-up, final corrections and balancing of systems take octave band sound measurements
over full audio frequency range in areas adjacent to mechanical equipment rooms, duct and pipe
shafts, and other critical locations, as directed. Provide one-third octave band measurements of
artificial sound sources in areas indicated as having critical requirements. Submit complete report
of test results including sound curves.

3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

SECTION 15070 – SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 6/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers’ field services.

B Provide services of testing agency to take noise measurement. Use meters meeting requirements
of ASA 47 (ANSI S1.4).

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15070 – SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 7/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15075

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes nameplates, tags, stencils and pipe markers.

B Related Sections:

1. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A ASME A13.1 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems.

B The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified CE, TÜV or equivalent authorities

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

C Shop Drawings: Provide list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical
identification and a valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve
manufacturer's name and model number.

D Samples: Submit two tags, 38 mm in size. Submit two labels, 48 x 19 mm in size.

E Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and

installation.

F Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Not Used.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum
three years documented experience.

B Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.9 WARRANTY

SECTION 15075 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 1/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide one year manufacturer warranty for materials.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B Supply two containers of spray-on adhesive.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor may
submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of the
Engineer.

2.2 NAMEPLATES

A Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color.

2.3 TAGS

A Plastic Tags:

1. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size
minimum 38 mm square.

B Metal Tags:

1. Aluminum with stamped letters; tag size minimum 38 mm square with smooth edges.

C Information Tags:

1. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 83 x 143 mm with
grommet and self-locking nylon ties.

D Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location plastic laminated.

2.4 STENCILS

A Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

1. Up to 51 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 13 mm high letters.

2. 64-150 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 25-mm high letters.

3. Over 150 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 44 mm high letters.

4. Ductwork and Equipment: 44 mm high letters.

B Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09900, semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to
ASME A13.1.

2.5 PIPE MARKERS

A Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B Plastic Pipe Markers:

1. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes
may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.

C Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:

1. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

D Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:

SECTION 15075 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 2/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 150 mm wide by 0.10 mm thick,
manufactured for direct burial service.

2.6 CEILING TACKS

A Description: Steel with 19 mm diameter color-coded head.

B Color code as follows:

1. HVAC equipment: Yellow.

2. Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red.

3. Plumbing valves: Green.

4. Heating/cooling valves: Blue.

2.7 LABELS

A Description: Aluminum, size 48 x 19 mm, adhesive backed with printed identification and bar code.

2.8 LOCKOUT DEVICES

A Lockout Hasps:

1. Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 184 x 76 mm.

B Valve Lockout Devices:

1. Plastic device preventing access to valve operator, accepting lock shackle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09900 for stencil painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09900.

B Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

C Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

D Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For
unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

E Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.

F Install underground plastic pipe markers 150 to 200 mm below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.

G Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with
plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.

H Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

I Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

J Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.

K Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

L Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Identify service, flow direction, and
pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 6 m on
straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of
structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

SECTION 15075 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 3/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

M Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area
served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure,
and at each obstruction.

N Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of
panel closest to equipment.

3.3 SCHEDULES

Submit schedules for approval by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15075 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 4/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15080

MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes ductwork insulation duct liner insulation jackets, equipment insulation, covering,
breeching insulation, thermal insulation for piping systems including vapor retarders, jackets and
accessories.

B Related Sections:

1. Section 07270- Air Barriers: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this
section.

2. Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting insulation
jackets and covering specified by this section.

3. Section 15060 – Hangers and Supports: Execution requirements for inserts for placement
by this section.

4. Section 15075 – Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for mechanical

identification for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

B ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (ASTM
B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate Metric,).

C ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus.

D ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.

E ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement.

F ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

G ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.

H ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.

I ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.

J ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.

K ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial
and Industrial Applications.

L ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal
Insulation.

M ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe
Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type).

N ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.

O ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

SECTION 15080 – MECHANICAL INSULATION 1/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

P ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic
Stainless Steel.

Q ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct
Lining Material).

R ASTM C1126- Standard Specification for Preformed Closed Cell Phenolic Foam Pipe and Board
Insulation.

S ASTM C1136 – Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal
Insulation.

T ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

U ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

V ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

W ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat
Energy Source.

X ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to
Fungi.

Y NAIMA (North American Insulation Manufacturers Association) - National Insulation Standards.

Z SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) - HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

AA The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.

C Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insulation type.

D Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable

workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.

E Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented, experience.

B Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented, experience approved by manufacturer.

1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification,
including product density and thickness.

C Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
damage, by storing in original wrapping.

SECTION 15080 – MECHANICAL INSULATION 2/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B Do not install insulation outside ambient conditions required by manufacturer of each product.

C Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.9 WARRANTY

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide one manufacturer warranty for man made fiber.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 DUCT INSULATION

- Duct insulation shall be blanket type of fibrous glass with a resin binder and a density of not less
than 24 kg/m³ and a K-factor of not more than 0.25 Btu.In/ft2.hr.oF at a mean temperature of 24 oC
for indoor installation and rigid board of fiberglass with a density of 48 kg/m³ for outdoor application.

- For cold air application, insulation shall be faced with factory applied reinforced foil and paper
which comprises aluminium foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh and laminated to 40 lbs
chemically treated fire retardant kraft complies with NFPA 90A.

- 50 x 50 x 0.6 mm galvanized sheet metal angles shall be attached at corners.

- Round duct insulation shall be flexible roll form fiber glass of same K-factor and vapour barrier
characteristics as those of rectangular duct above, but with a density of 16 Kg/m³.

- The surface finish shall be an 8-ounce canvas applied using vapor barrier mastic and a full coat of
lapping cement, then a second coat of lapping cement over the entire canvas surface.

- Duct installed inside mechanical rooms and exposed on roof shall be insulated as specified for
outdoor duct applications and cladded with 0.6mm aluminum jacketing.

2.3 ACOUSTIC DUCT LINER

- All supply, return and exhaust air ducts shall be lined internally with fiberglass duct liner up to a
minimum length of 3.0 meters, unless required for further sound attenuation, from their connections
with the air handling units and fans. Duct liner shall be rigid board fiberglass of minimum density of
24 kg/m³ and a K-factor of not more than 0.25 Btu / ft²hr.ºF. Duct acoustic liner shall have one
surface covered with heavy coating of black pigmented neoprene layer. The liner shall be made out
of treated fiber which inhibits the gross of fungus and bacteria in humid environment.

2.4 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT - INSULATION

- Insulation shall be 50 mm thick mineral wool bats reinforced wire mesh, 3lbs/ft3 (48Kg/m3) density,
3.6 Btu.in/ft2.hr.oF (0.52 W/m.deg.K) K-factor at mean temperature of 75 oF ( 24 oC ) secured with
metal mechanical surfaces fasteners on 460 mm centers. 75mm air clearance shall be provided
between the exhaust duct and construction material. Exposed portions shall be finished with 8
ounce glass cloth jacket neatly pasted on, unless otherwise shown on Drawings or as instructed by
the Engineer.

2.5 INSULATION FOR HOT SYSTEMS PIPES 2 1/8" AND ABOVE.

- Pipe insulation shall be performed rigid section fiberous glass molded in cylindrical form to fit
snugly, sectional one piece construction, with a density of not less than 96 kg/m³ and a max. K-
factor of 0.25 Btu.in/Ft2 hr. oF at a mean temperature of 24 oC side and end laps of jacket shall be

SECTION 15080 – MECHANICAL INSULATION 3/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

pasted down with lapping cement and secured with aluminium bands using a minimum of three
bands per block.

- All pipes running in concealed spaces shall have canvas cover, securely fixed, overlaps firmly
pasted down, secured with aluminium bands at intervals and painted with two coats of fire retardant
emulsion paint.

- All pipes running inside building but exposed to view shall have same treatment as in concealed
spaces with one coat of gloss paint to an approved colour, in addition.

- Pipes running exposed on roof or in plant rooms shall be covered with 0.6mm aluminium jacket on
top of insulation.

2.6 INSULATION FOR HOT WATER SYSTEMS PIPES UP TO 1 5/8" INCLUSIVE

- Pipe insulation shall be Euroflex 12mm thick.

- Pipe running exposed on roof or in plant rooms shall be covered with 0.6mm thick aluminium jacket
on top of insulation.

2.7 INSULATION FOR CONDENSATE DRAIN INDOOR

- Pipe insulation shall be Euroflex 9mm thick.

2.8 PIPE INSULATION FOR CHILLED WATER PIPES.

- Pipe insulation shall be performed rigid section fiberous glass molded in cylindrical form to fit
snuggly, sectional one piece construction with a min. density of 96 kg/m³ and a max. K factor of
0.25 Btu.in/ft2. hr. oF at a mean temperature of 24 oC. The insulation shall have a factory applied
high density white kraft bonded to aluminium foil, reinforced with fiber glass yarn. The kraft paper
shall be chemically treated to assure fire and smoke safety, to comply with NEPA 90A
requirements, and to prevent corrosion of foil. The insulation shall be applied to the pipe with
longitudinal joints staggered. Laps and sealing strips shall be sealed applying fire resistant
adhesive or circumferential joints.

- The surface finish shall be secured with aluminium bands, using a minimum of three bands per
block.

- All pipes running exposed to view inside the building shall have canvas cover, securely fixed,
overlaps firmly, pasted down, secured with aluminium bands at intervals and painted with two
coats of fire retardant emulsion paint and one coat of gloss paint to an approved colour.

- Pipes running outdoor or exposed on roof or plant rooms shall be covered with 0.6mm aluminium
jacket on top of insulation.

2.9 EQUIPMENT INSULATION

- This type of insulation shall apply to electric water heaters, pumps, heat exchangers hot water
expansion tanks and domestic hot water tanks.

Insulation shall be semi-rigid fibrous glass with organic binder up in board form with a minimum
density of 50 kg/m³ and a maximum K-factor of 0.42 Btu-in/ft2.hr.oF at a mean temperature of 94
oC. Insulation shall be applied over pins welded to the vessel on 300 mm centers. All joints shall be
staggered and tightly butted. The insulation shall be covered with gauge 18 aluminium jacket.

2.10 ACOUSTIC TREATMENT OF GENERATOR ROOM

Contractor shall provide complete acoustic treatment for Generator Building and submit detailed technical
proposal with calculations based on the following.

A. Noise level from the Generator Building shall not exceed max 78 NC at any location 1 meter from
the Generator Building.

B. Generator set shall be provided with critical type silencer.

C. All doors and windows shall be sound proof with appropriate acoustic ratings.

D. Acoustic lining shall be provided in the inner surface of walls in the generator room.

SECTION 15080 – MECHANICAL INSULATION 4/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

E. Outdoor air intakes and exhausts shall be provided with sound attenuators, sized based on Engine
noise levels.

F. Radiator fans shall be upgraded for addition static due to sound attenuators, or additional intake
booster fans shall be provided.

G. Acoustic proposal shall include detailed calculations, method statement, installation details, and
testing and commissioning procedures, and shall be fully coordinated with Genset Supplier /
Manufacturer, before submitting for the review and approval of the Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Verify that piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

C Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

B Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

C Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including
fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies,, and expansion joints.

D Inserts and Shields:

1. Application: Piping or Equipment 40, 50mm diameter or larger.

2. Shields: Galvanized, steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.

3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.

4. Insert configuration: Minimum 150 mm long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining
insulation; may be factory fabricated.

5. Insert material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for the planned
temperature range and service.

E Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having a

fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing
insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Section 07270 for
penetrations of assemblies with a fire resistance rating greater than one hour.

F Exterior Applications: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with
insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced
vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum, stainless steel, jacket with seams located at the 3 or
9 o’clock position on the side of horizontal piping with the overlap facing down to shed water or on
the bottom side of horizontal equipment.

G Buried Piping: Insulate only where the manufacturer of a specific insulation recommends that their
product may be installed either in a trench, tunnel or direct buried. Provide factory fabricated
assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open
mesh glass fabric, with 0.025 mm thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of
bituminous compound; outer surface faced with a polyester film.

H Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining
pipe. Provide a size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum, stainless
steel, jacket with seams located at the 3 or 9 o’clock position on the side of horizontal piping with
the overlap facing down to shed water.

I Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.

SECTION 15080 – MECHANICAL INSULATION 5/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

J Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

K Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten
insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.

L Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On
cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.

M Insulated equipment that contains fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system.

N Mineral fiber insulated equipment that contains fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor
retarder jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass-cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.

O For hot equipment that contains fluids over 60 degrees C, insulate flanges and unions with
removable sections and jackets.

P Mineral fiber insulated equipment that contains fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard
jackets, with or without vapor retarder, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and
adhesive.

Q Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.

R Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with canvas jacket sized
for finish painting, PVC jacket and fitting covers, aluminum jacket, stainless steel jacket,.

S Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.

T Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation so it can be
easily removed and replaced without damage.

U Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:

1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets.

2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket.

3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.

4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections,
and expansion joints.

V Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:

1. Provide with or without standard vapor retarder jacket.

2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of
insulation.

W Ductwork Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Finish with aluminum jacket sized for finish
painting. Ductwork Exposed in Finished Spaces, shall be factory pre-insulated duct.

X Exterior Applications and in Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Provide insulation with vapor retarder
jacket. Cover with outdoor jacket finished with caulked 0.6 aluminum jacket with seams located on
bottom side of horizontal duct section,.

Y External Duct Insulation Application:

1. Secure insulation with vapor retarder with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor retarder
adhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Secure insulation without vapor retarder with staples, tape, or wires.

3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners

where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert
spacers.

4. Seal vapor retarder penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor retarder adhesive.

5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation
without disturbing wrapping.

SECTION 15080 – MECHANICAL INSULATION 6/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Z Duct and Plenum, Liner Application:

1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90, 100 percent coverage.

2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. SMACNA Standards for spacing.

3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.

4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.

5. Provide galvanized metal strips formed in a way to secure liner in place at both ends of
lining. Such strips shall be riveted to the duct walls

6. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct
size to allow for insulation thickness.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF INSULATION THICKNESS

The thickness of the insulation applied to pipes, ducts and equipment shall be as stated hereinafter.
Insulation
Pipe Diameter Thickness
Service Location inches (mm) (mm)

- A/C condensate drain pipes indoor --- 9

- Domestic hot and return water

pipes --- up to 1 5/8" 12

- Ditto --- 2 1/8" and larger 32

- Ditto running on roof and in

mechanical rooms --- as above with
aluminium
jacketing
- Cold water running on
roofs only as above with
aluminium
jacketing

- Chilled water pipes --- up to 2 ½” 40

- Ditto --- 3” to 8” 50

- Ditto --- 10” and above 63

- Supply and return In conditioned

air ducts spaces --- 40

- Supply and return In unconditioned

air ducts spaces --- 50

- Acoustic Duct Liner --- --- 25

- Range Hood Exhaust --- --- 50

- Dishwasher exhaust duct --- --- 38

- Refrigerant suction line --- --- 50

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15080 – MECHANICAL INSULATION 7/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15110

VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. The Work under this Section consists of supplying and installing all the valves required for the
mechanical systems and shown on the drawings as specified herein.

B. Related Section:-

1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements

2. Section 15515 Hydronic Specialties
3. Section 15430 Plumbing Specialties

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. AWS (American Welding Society) - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

MSS SP-67 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Butterfly
Valves.

MSS SP-71 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Cast Iron
Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

MSS SP-78 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Cast Iron
Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

MSS SP-80 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Bronze
Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

MSS SP-85 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Cast Iron
Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

MSS SP-110 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Ball
Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.

B. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

ANSI B2.1 Pipe Threads.

ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800.

ANSI B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.

ANSI B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

ANSI B16.24 Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150 and 300.

ANSI B16.25 Butt Welding Ends.

C. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASME B31.1 Power Piping - ASME Code for Pressure Piping.

ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping - ASME Code for Pressure Piping.

D. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

ASTM A 126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe
Fittings.

ASTM B 62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

SECTION 15110 – VALVES 1/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

E. BSI - British Standards Institute

BS 21 Pipe Threads for Tubes and Fittings.

BS 143 Malleable Cast Iron and Cast Copper Alloy threaded Pipe Fittings.

BS 1560 Steel Pipe Flanges.

BS 4504 Flanges and Bolting for Pipes, Valves and Fittings.

BS 5154 Copper alloy Globe, Globe Stop, and Check, Check and Gate valves

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including body material, valve design,
pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material
and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions.

1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original new and unopened packages bearing
manufacturer's name and label. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and
corrosion. Protect valve ends against damage to threads, flange faces, and weld-end preps.

B. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature higher than ambient
dew point temperature. Support valve off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures.

C. Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid
damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures.

E Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A Perform Work in accordance with Public Work's standard.

B Maintain one copy of each document on site.

C Comply with the requirements ASME B31.9 and applicable Standards of MSS.

D. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves, of types and

sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years, and shall be subject to approval of Engineer.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented experience.

B Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

SECTION 15110 – VALVES 2/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 MATERIALS: Shall be as follows where applicable, unless otherwise shown on drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.

A. PLUMBING VALVES: As shown on drawings or as approved by the Engineer.

B. GATE VALVES

1. Up To and Including (80 mm): MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising
stem, hand-wheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder, or threaded, ends.

2. 50 mm and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and
yoke, hand-wheel, solid wedge disc, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for
valves (150 mm) and larger mounted over (2400 mm) above floor.

C. GLOBE VALVES

1. Up To and Including (80 mm): MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, hand-
wheel, bronze disc, threaded ends.

2. 50 mm and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, hand-wheel, outside
screw and yoke, renewable bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends. Provide
chain-wheel operators for valves 150 mm and larger mounted over 2400 mm above floor.

D. BALL VALVES

1. Construction, 100 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 2760 kPa CWP, bronze, two
piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-
out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, threaded ends.

E. PLUG VALVES

1. Construction 65 mm and Larger: MSS SP-78, 1200 kPa CWP, cast iron body and plug,
pressure lubricated, teflon, flanged ends. Provide lever operator with setscrew.

F. BUTTERFLY VALVES

1. Construction 40 mm and Larger: MSS SP-67, 1380 kPa CWP, cast or ductile iron body.
Elastomer coated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, grooved ends,
extended neck, 10 position lever handle. Provide gear operators for valves 150 mm and
larger, and chain-wheel operators for valves mounted over 2400 mm above floor.

G. FLOW CONTROLS

1. Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature
and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet, blow-down/back-flush drain.

2. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure
range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control. The minimum pressure shall be
24 kPa.

3. For Automatic Flow Control and Balancing requirements refer to Section 15515 –
Hydronic Specialties

H. SWING CHECK VALVES

1. Up To and Including 80 mm:

a. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber
seat, solder, or, threaded, ends.

2. 50 mm and Larger:

a. MSS SP-71, Class 125, iron body, bronze swing disc, flanged ends.

I. SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES

SECTION 15110 – VALVES 3/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Construction: Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc,
seals, wafer style ends.

J. WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

1. Up to 50 mm:

a. Construction: MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic

internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded ends.

2. Over 50 mm:

a. Construction: MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm
and seat disc, flanged.

K. RELIEF VALVES

1. Pressure Relief:

a. Construction: Bronze body, Teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic,
direct pressure actuated at maximum 400 kPa, UL listed for fuel oil, capacities
ASME certified and labeled.

2. Temperature and Pressure Relief:

a. Construction: AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel
stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief
maximum 98.9 degrees C, capacity ASME SEC IV certified and labeled.

L. GATE VALVES

1. Up To and Including 50 mm:

a. Construction: Bronze body, bronze trim, screwed, union, bonnet, rising, stem,
inside screw, solid wedge disc, threaded ends.

2. Over 50 mm:

a. Construction: Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, hand-wheel,
outside screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends.

M. GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES

1. Up To and Including 50 mm:

a. Construction: Bronze body, bronze trim, union bonnet, rising stem, inside screw
renewable composition disc and bronze seat, threaded ends.

2. Over 50 mm:

a. Construction: Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, hand-wheel,
outside screw and yoke, rotating plug-type disc with renewable seat ring and
disc, flanged ends.

N. BALL VALVES

1. Up To and Including 50 mm:

a. Construction: Bronze one piece body, chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats and
stuffing box ring, lever handle with balancing stops, threaded ends.

2. Over 50 mm:

a. Construction: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing
box seals, lever handle, or gear drive hand-wheel for sizes 250 mm and over
flanged.

SECTION 15110 – VALVES 4/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

O. PLUG VALVES

1. Up To and Including 50 mm:

a. Construction: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, full port opening,

non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends.

b. Operator: One plug valve wrench for every ten plug-valves with a minimum of
one wrench.

2. Over 50 mm:

a. Construction: Cast iron body and plug, full port opening, pressure lubricated,
teflon packing, flanged ends.

b. Operator: Each plug valve with a wrench with setscrew.

P. BUTTERFLY VALVES

1. Body: Cast or ductile iron with resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer or lug ends,
extended neck.

2. Disc: Chrome plated ductile iron.

3. Operator: 10 position lever handle.

Q. SWING CHECK VALVES

1 Up To and Including 50 mm:

a. Construction: Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc, with
composition disc, threaded ends.

2. Over 50 mm:

a. Construction: Iron body, bronze trim, bronze or bronze faced rotating swing disc,
renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.

R. SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES

1. Construction: Iron body, bronze trim, split plate, hinged with stainless steel spring,
resilient seal bonded to body, wafer or threaded lug ends.

S. FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

1. Unions for Pipe 50 mm and Under:

a. Ferrous Piping: 1034 kPa malleable iron, threaded.

b. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.

2. Flanges for Pipe Over 50 mm:

a. Ferrous Piping: 1034 kPa forged steel, slip-on.

b. Copper Piping: Bronze.

3. Gaskets: 1.6 mm thick preformed neoprene.

4. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:

a. Housing Clamps: galvanized to engage and lock designed to permit some

angular deflection, contraction, and expansion.

b. Sealing Gasket: C-shape elastomer composition for operating temperature range

from -34 degrees C to 110 degrees C.

5. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

SECTION 15110 – VALVES 5/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

6. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder
end, water impervious isolation barrier.

2.3 VALVE BOXES:

A. Shall be precast or of cast-in-place reinforced concrete with approved type of cast iron cover as
shown on the drawings. The traffic loading and surface finish shall be coordinated with Final
Hardscape Design. Concrete shall be Class 30 conforming to Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE, 30 MPa compressive strength at 28 days, with type V cement or as specified in the
related Section of the Specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Verify Piping System is ready for installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

B Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

C Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.

D Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct
welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus.

E Install gate, ball, or, butterfly, valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or
vertical risers.

F Install globe, ball, or, butterfly, valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

G Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.

H Provide plug valves in natural, propane, gas systems for shut-off service.

I Provide flow controls in water re-circulating systems where indicated.

J Use butterfly valves in chilled and condenser water systems interchangeably with gate and globe
valves.

K Use only butterfly valves in chilled and condenser water systems for throttling and isolation service.

L Use lug end butterfly valves to isolate equipment.

M Use all bronze valves for fuel oil service.

N Use 20 mm gate valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of
vertical risers, and at equipment.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION:

A. General Application: Use gate, ball and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe and ball for
throttling duty. Refer to drawings and piping system specification sections for specific valve
application and arrangement. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where
necessary.

B. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow equipment
removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

C. Install 3-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling type valves.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

SECTION 15110 – VALVES 6/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

E. Swing check valves shall be installed in horizontal position with hinge pin level.

F. Solder, threaded and flanged connections shall be as per the approved trade practice.

G. Flushing of the system is to be done without cartridges in the pressure independent control valves if
possible if bypasses are not provided.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Testing: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and
balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valve if
leak persists.

3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Conform to applicable piping specification for hangers and insulation

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15110 – VALVES 7/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15140

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes domestic water piping, valves, fittings, hangers, pumps, water softeners, controls
and accessories.

B Related Sections:

1. Section 03100 – Concrete Forms and Accessories: Execution requirements for placement
of inserts and sleeves specified by this section.

2. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of

concrete house keeping pads specified by this section.

3. Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting material
specified by this section.

4. Section 15070 – Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control: Product requirements
for vibration isolators for placement by this section.

5. Section 15080 – Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for pipe identification and
valve tags for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM F1281 ANSI/NSF 61 system, PE-RT / AL / PERT

B ASME B16.18 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Pressure Fittings.

C ASME B16.22 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder
Joint Pressure Fittings.

D ASME B16.26 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared
Copper Tubes.

E ASME B31.9 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Building Service Piping.

F ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

G ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

H ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe.

I ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube (ASTM B88M - Seamless Copper Water Tube Metric).

J ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.

K ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series).

L ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

M ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

N AWS A5.8 (American Welding Society) - Brazing Filler Metal.

O AWWA C651 (American Water Works Association) - Disinfecting Water Mains.

P AWWA C900 (American Water Works Association) - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in.
Through 12 in. for Water Distribution.

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 1 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Q MSS SP58 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Pipe
Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

R MSS SP-67 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Butterfly
Valves.

S MSS SP69 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Pipe
Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

T MSS SP-70 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Cast Iron
Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

U MSS SP-71 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Cast Iron
Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

V MSS SP-78 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Cast Iron
Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

W MSS SP-80 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Bronze
Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

X MSS SP-85 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Cast Iron
Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

Y MSS SP89 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Pipe
Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

Z MSS SP-110 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Ball
Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.

AA UL 1479 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.

AB ASME A1126.1 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Water Hammer Arrestors.

AC ASSE 1011 (American Society of Sanitary Engineering) - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.

AD ASSE 1012 (American Society of Sanitary Engineering) - Backflow Preventers with Immediate
Atmospheric Vent.

AE ASSE 1013 (American Society of Sanitary Engineering) - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure
Principle.

AF ASSE 1019 (American Society of Sanitary Engineering) - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic
Draining Anti-Backflow Types.

AG AWWA C506 (American Water Works Association) - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced
Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types.

AH PDI WH-201 (Plumbing and Drainage Institute) - Water Hammer Arrestors.

AI ASHRAE 90A (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air onditioning Engineers) - Energy
Conservation in New Building.

AJ The factory assembled major r equipments shall be UL listed or certified CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Product Data:

1. Submit data on pipe materials; pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

2. Submit pump type, capacity and power requirements.

3. Submit certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and
system operating point plot. Include NPSH curve when applicable.

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 2 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for pumps, valves and
accessories.

D Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves and equipment.

C Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts list, exploded assembly views and
recommended maintenance intervals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Perform Work in accordance with Public Work's standard and/or in accordance with DIN 1988 of
water supply technical regulations and standards.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented, experience and with service facilities within the region.

B Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented, experience.

C. Installation: Absolutely failure-free installation procedures, simple, easy, and safe checking and
testing for the installed system. All joints and connections should withstand safely higher pressures
than the pipe’s maximum operating pressure.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B Accept valves and equipment on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for
damage.

C Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

D Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

E Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of
the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 3 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.11 WARRANTY

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide one year manufacturer warranty for domestic water piping.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B Supply two (or 10% which ever is greater) packing kits for each size valve two (or 10% which ever
is greater) loose keys for outside hose bibs, hose end vacuum breakers for hose bibs, and two
pump seals, for each pump model.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 WATER PIPING, BURIED UNDERGROUND OR WITHIN PUMP ROOM

A PVC Pipe: AWWA C900; uPVC Schedule 80

B Fittings: uPVC Schedule 80

C Joints:

1. Solvent cement or Bolt and Spigot Type

2. Solvent Welded joints for joining pipes and pipe fittings using
solvent cement conforming to ASTM D2564

2.3 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Pipes for up to 4”

1. Multi layer composite pipes PE-RT / AL / PE-RT manufactured as per ASTM F1281 and
approved by NSF Standard. Manufactured by UPONOR or approved equal and certified
by DVGW, SKZ and WBS.

2. Fittings :

a. Nickel or Tin plated brass fittings with press fitting joints.

b. PPSU fitting with press fitting joints manufactured by UPOCOR or approved equal.
Approvals; DVGW 542, SKZ 243

3. Operating long term parameters; -40°C up to +95°C & 0 bar (vacuum) up to 10 bar.

4. Maximum expansion factor; 0.25mm/mK

5. Average internal surface roughness < 0.0004mm

B Copper Tubing: ASTM B88M, Type L, hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.

2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

C. For pipes above 4"

Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40, stainless steel

1. Fittings: Stainless Steel.

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 4 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2. Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings.

2.4 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed
neoprene gaskets.

2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.

B Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:

1. Housing: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular
deflection, contraction, and expansion; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for
galvanized pipe.

2. Sealing gasket: "C" shape composition sealing- gasket.

C Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end,
water impervious isolation barrier.

2.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A Plumbing Piping: Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89.

B Hangers for Pipe Sizes 15 to 40 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

C Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

D Hangers for Hot Pipe, Sizes 50 to 100 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

E Hangers for Hot Pipe, Sizes 150 mm and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron pipe roll and double
hanger.

F Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods.

G Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Steel channels with welded
supports or spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.

H Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 80 mm: Cast iron hooks.

I Wall Support for 100 mm and over Pipe Size: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamps.

J Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp
with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll.

K Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

L Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.

M Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 100 mm: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

N Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Adjustable cast iron pipe roll and stand, steel
screws, and concrete pier or steel support.

O Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plate

2.6 GATE VALVES

A Up To and Including 50 mm:

1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, inside screw,
solid wedge disc, threaded, ends.

B 50 mm and Larger:

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 5 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. MSS SP-70, Class 125,, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, hand wheel,
solid wedge disc, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 150 mm and
larger mounted over 2400 mm above floor.

2.7 GLOBE VALVES

A Up To and Including 50 mm:

1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, hand wheel, bronze, Teflon, disc,
solder, or, threaded, ends.

B 50 mm and Larger:

1. MSS SP-85, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, hand wheel, outside screw and yoke,
renewable bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends.

2. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 150 mm and larger mounted over 2400 mm
above floor.

2.8 BALL VALVES

A Construction, 100 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 2760 kPa CWP, bronze, two piece
body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem,
lever handle with balancing stops, threaded, ends with union.

2.9 PLUG VALVES

A Construction 65 mm and Larger: MSS SP-78, 1200 kPa CWP, cast iron body and plug, pressure
lubricated, teflon packing, flanged, ends. Provide lever operator with setscrew.

2.10 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A Construction 40 mm and Larger:

1. MSS SP-67, (1380 kPa) CWP, cast or ductile iron body, elastomer coated ductile iron,
disc, resilient replaceable EPDM, seat, wafer, lug, or, grooved, ends, extended neck, 10
position lever handle, infinite position lever handle with memory stop.

2. Provide gear operators for valves 150 mm and larger, and chain-wheel operators for
valves mounted over 2400 mm above floor.

2.11 FLOW CONTROLS

A Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and
pressure test plug on inlet and outlet.

B Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure range of 10
times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 24 kPa.

2.12 SWING CHECK VALVES

A Up To and Including 50 mm:

1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat,
threaded, ends.

B 50 mm and Larger:

1. MSS SP-71, Class 125, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc seal and seat,
flanged or grooved ends.

2.13 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES

A Class 150, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N, seals, wafer style
ends.

2.14 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 6 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Up to 50 mm:

1. MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric
reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded, and single union, ends.

B Over 50 mm:

1. MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flange

2.15 RELIEF VALVES

A Pressure Relief:

1. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct
pressure actuate

B Temperature and Pressure Relief:

1. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs,
automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 98.9 degrees C, capacity
ASME SEC IV certified and labels

2.16 STRAINERS

A Size 50 mm and Under:

1. Threaded brass body for (1200 kPa) CWP, or Class 150, threaded bronze body (2070
kPa) CWP, Y pattern with (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.

B Size (40 mm) to (100 mm):

1. Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with (1.6 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.

C Size (125 mm) and Larger:

1. Class 125, flanged iron body, basket pattern with 2 mm stainless steel perforated screen.

2.17 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS

A General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant: Water based, non-slumping, premixed sealant with
intumescent properties, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

B General Purpose Vibration Resistant Fire Stopping Sealant: Silicone based, non-slumping,
premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours
per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

2.18 RECESSED VALVE BOX

A Washing Machine: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass, socket for (50 mm) waste, slip in
finishing cover.

B Refrigerator: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass valves with wheel handle slip in finishing
cover.

2.19 BACK WATER VALVES

A Cast Iron: ANSI A1121.2; lacquered, cast iron body and cover, brass valve, 150 mm extension
sleeve, and access cover.

B Plastic: PVC, body and valve, 150 mm extension sleeve, and access cover.

2.20 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013

1. Bronze body, with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs.

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 7 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2. Two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential
pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under
back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two
gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.

B Double Check Valve Assemblies: ANSI/ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal
parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate
atmospheric vent.

2.21 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A ANSI A1126.1; stainless steel, construction, bellows, type sized in accordance with PDI WH-201.

B Pre-charged suitable for operation in temperature range -73 to 149 degrees C and maximum 1700
kPa working pressure.

2.22 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES

A Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel bellows, integral temperature adjustment.

B Capacity: as indicated on the drawings

C Accessories:

1. Check valve on inlets.

2. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet.

3. Stem thermometer on outlet.

4. Strainer stop checks on inlets.

D Cabinet: 1.5 mm stainless steel for recessed, mounting with keyed lock.

2.23 PRESSURE BALANCED MIXING VALVES

A Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel cylinder and integral temperature
adjustment.

B Capacity: as indicated on the drawings.

C Accessories:

1. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet.

2. Stem thermometer on outlet.

3. Strainer stop checks on inlets.

D Cabinet: 1.5 mm stainless steel for recessed, mounting with keyed lock.

2.24 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS

A Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ASME Code;
supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 860 kPa, with flexible EPDM,
diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles.

B Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; pre-charge to 80 kPa.

C Size: as indicated on the drawings.

2.25 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS

A Casing: Bronze rated for (860 kPa) working pressure with stainless steel rotor assembly.

B Impeller: Bronze.

C Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two, oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings.

D Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 8 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

E Flexible drive coupling.

F Performance: Refer to the Drawings.

2.26 PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEMS

A System: Packaged with factory assembled, tested, and adjusted; shipped to site as integral unit;
consisting of pumps, valves, and galvanized piping, with control panel assembled on fabricated
steel base with structural steel framework, capacity as per the drawings.

B Controls and Instruments: Locate in NEMA 250 Type 1, general-purpose enclosure with main
disconnecting switch interlocked with door.

1. Provide for each motor, a fused circuit, magnetic starter with three overloads, control
circuit transformer with fuse protection and a selector switch for each pump.

2. Provide low limit pressure switch, low pressure alarm indicator, running indicator, current
sensing devices, minimum run timers, automatic alternation, and suction and discharge
pressure gages.

C Lead Pump: Operate continuously with lag pumps, operating on system demand. Should lead
pump fail to operate, next pump in sequence shall start automatically.

D Time Delay Relay: Prevent lag pumps, short cycling on fluctuating demands.

E Thermal Bleed Circuit with Solenoid Valve: Prevent overheating during low demand.

F Low Pressure Control: Stop pump operation if incoming water pressure drops to atmospheric.

G Pump Switch: Permit manual or automatic operation.

H Valves: Each pump outlet, combination pressure reducing and check valve to maintain constant
system pressure. Provide gate or butterfly valves on suction and discharge of each pump. Provide
check valve on each pump discharge.

I Time Clock for Automatic Day-Night Changeover:

1. Day cycle: System shall operate continuously with pressure to fixtures maintained by
pressure reducing valves.

2. Night Cycle: Pumps, shall operate intermittently on pressure switch located near pressure
tank operating pump for pre-determined adjustable time period.

J Performance: As indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavate

3.2 PREPARATION

A Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A Install Work in accordance with Public Works standards.

B Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

C Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 9 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

D Install piping to maintain headroom and neither interfere with use of space nor take more space
than necessary.

E Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment. Refer to Section 15125.

G Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation
and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15060.

H Provide access where valves and fittings are not expose Coordinate size and location of access
doors with Section 08310, and as per drawings.

I Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 900 mm of cover.

J Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

K Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.

L Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
Refer to Section 09900.

M Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 02200.

N Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

O Install water piping to ASME B31.9.

P Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.

Q Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.

2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.

3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 100
mm.

4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt
with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.

R Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASTM B31.9, ASTM F708, and, MSS SP89.

2. Support horizontal piping as schedule

3. Install hangers to provide minimum 15 mm space between finished covering and adjacent
work.

4. Place hangers within 300 mm of each horizontal elbow.

5. Use hangers with 40 mm minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

6. Support vertical piping at every other, floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.

7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.

8. Provide sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping.

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 10 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09900. Hangers and
supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not
considered expose.

10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to
Section 15070.

S Install potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water
may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation,
irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs.

T Pipe relief from valves, back-flow preventers and drains to nearest floor drain.

U Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water
supply piping to each group of fixtures, washing machine outlets and all guide closing valves.

V Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures (each
washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 20 mm minimum, and minimum 450 mm long.

W Pumps:

1. Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 600 mm below lowest
invert into sump pit and minimum 150 mm clearance from bottom of sump pit.

2. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.

3. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check
valve and balancing valve on discharge.

4. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping
adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under
elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 100 mm and over.

5. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation, will not overload in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25
percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

6. Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.

3.4 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure, double check, back-flow
preventer and, water meter with by-pass valves pressure reducing valve, and sand strainer.

B Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced-concrete bridge. Caulk
enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main inside to concrete
wall.

3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

B Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.

C Install gate, ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical
risers.

D Install globe, ball, or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

E Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment.

F Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.

G Provide flow controls in water circulating systems where indicate

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B Slope water piping minimum 0.25 percent and arrange to drain at low points.

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 11 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3.7 CLEANING

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

B Disinfecting of Domestic Water

C Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

D Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash)
or acid (hydrochloric).

E Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder and tablet or gas form, throughout system to
obtain a residual from 50 to 80 mg/L.

F Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15
percent of outlets.

G Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

H If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

I Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.

J Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10, percent of outlets and from water
entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

3.8 SCHEDULES

METAL PIPE HANGER SPACING

A Pipe size: 15 to 32 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 2 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 9 mm.

B Pipe size: 40 to 50 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 9 mm.

C Pipe size: 65 to 75 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 13 mm.

D Pipe size: 100 to 150 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 15 mm.

E Pipe size: 200 to 300 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 4.25 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 22 mm.

F. Pipe size: 350 mm and over:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 6 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 25 mm

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15140 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 12 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15150

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes pipe, pipe fittings, connections and equipment for sanitary sewer piping systems.
This section also includes floor drains, cleanouts, interceptors, manholes and sewage ejectors.

B Related Sections:

1. Section 03110 – Concrete Forms and Accessories: Execution requirements for placement
of inserts and sleeves specified by this section.

2. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of

concrete specified by this section.

3. Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting material
specified by this section.

4. Section 15075 – Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for pipe identification for
placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A ASME B13 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.

B ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

C ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

D ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

E ASTM D2665 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.

F ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

G ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.

H ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

I ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

J ASTM F679 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

K ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

L ASME A1121.1 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Floor Drains.

M UL 1479 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.

The factory assembled major r equipments shall be UL listed or certified CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes for sewage-
ejectors, and manholes.

C Product Data: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Provide manufacturers
catalog information. Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
Provide pump type, capacity, power requirements, certified pump curves showing pump
performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotte Include NPSH curve
when applicable. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

SECTION 15150 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 1/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

D Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for all material and
equipment.

E Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.

C Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit frequency of treatment required for interceptors. Include,
spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for all pumps and equipment.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Perform Work in accordance with Public Works standards.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented, experience.

B Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented, experience.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of
the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.11 WARRANTY

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide one year manufacturer warranty for sanitary waste and vent piping.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B Supply two sets of pump seals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

SECTION 15150 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 2/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.2 Pipes and fittings HDPE manufactured to DIN 19535, DIN 19537, DIN 8074, DIN 8075 fittings to carry a
BBA certificate No. 92/2796. – (Geberit HDPE or approved equal)

A. All materials should be manufactured under a BS 5750 / ISO 9000 approved scheme, and shall be
covered by a manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Fittings: HDPE

2. Joints: All pipes and fittings to be fusion welded by either electro sleeve coupling or butt
weld.

2.3 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 1500 mm OF BUILDING shall be as follows; unless
otherwise shown on Drawings.

A PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D303

1. Fittings: PVC

2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.4 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 1500 mm OF BUILDING shall be as follows; unless
otherwise shown on Drawings.

A PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D303

1. Fittings: PVC.

2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.5 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785 Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241 SDR-26 for not less than 1034 kPa
pressure rating.

1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, PVC.

2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 Solvent cement.

2.6 SANITARY WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE & RISERS (Where indicated on the Drawings)

A Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy, service, weight.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.

2. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum.

2.7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A Drain, Waste, and Vent: Conform to ASTM F708.

B Hangers for Pipe Sizes 15 to 40 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

C Hangers for Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

D Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

E Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 80 mm: Cast iron hooks.

F Wall Support for Pipe Sizes Over 100 mm: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

G Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

H Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or
steel support.

2.8 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS

SECTION 15150 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 3/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant: Water based, non-slumping, premixed sealant with
intumescent properties, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.
B General Purpose Vibration Resistant Fire Stopping Sealant: Silicone based, non-slumping,
premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours
per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

C DWV Plastic Pipe Systems Fire Stopping Sealant: Silicone based, premixed sealant with
intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL
1479 with metal collars.

2.9 FLOOR DRAINS

A Floor Drains (FD): Cast iron type with bronze strainer and cover finish as per interior decorator.

B Floor Drain (FD-1): Constructed of uPVC body with Integral deep trap seal (50mm) with pipe
connection inlet of 50mm and 75mm pipe outlet. The cover plate and strainer shall be of stainless
steel as approved by the Interior Designer and Engineer.

C Floor Drain (FD-2): Shower drain constructed of Dura-coated cast iron body with integral trap seal
side outlet and adjustable stainless steel cover as approved by the Interior Designer and Engineer.
ZURN model Z-450 .

D Floor Drain ( FD3 - Indirect Type) : ZURN MODEL : Z-415 body assembly with “Type-E” strainer
floor drain epoxy coated, cast iron body with bottom outlet, P-trap and 1/2” primer connection.
Combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable collar with polished, nickel bronze strainer
with 4” diameter funnel.

E FD-4 : Floor Drain (Kitchens and Laundry) : ZURN MODEL : Z-356 multi-inlet adjustable floor drain
with trap. Epoxy coated cast iron body with integral trap seal, complete with cleanout plug, invertia
collar, polished nickel bronze adjustable top.

F FD-5 : Planter Drain : ZURN MODEL : Z-352 – 6” diameter small area planting drain, epoxy coated
cast iron body with bottom outlet, plain bronze membrane flashing clamp and dome strainer with
stainless steel mesh screen over dome.

G Gutter Drain: Cast iron type with 5/8” priming line connected.

H GD-1: (Gutter Drain) ZURN Model 415 Body Assembly with “Type G” Strainer, Dura coated cast
iron body with bottom outlet, combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable collar with
“Type G” polished, nickel bronze strainer with dome grate.

I GD-2: (Gutter Grating) Gutter Drain similar to GD-1 with medium duty grating; “Kitchen and
Laundry ZURN Model Z-792. 12” x 20”. Dura coated cast iron medium duty grating in fabricated
steel frame with anchor strips.

J GD-3: (Gutter Grating) Gutter drain similar to GD-1 with heavy duty grating; ZURN Model Z-793.
12” x 24”. Dura coated cast iron heavy duty grating in fabricated steel frame with anchor strips.

K Area Drain (AD-1): Constructed of Dura-coated cast iron body with bottom outlet with no trap, with
flashing clamp and frame and medium duty cast iron 7” diameter slotted grating. ZURN Model Z-
507.

L Area Drain (AD-2) : Area Drain (Heavy Duty) : ZURN MODEL : Z-610 – 12” heavy duty drain 12”
square type drain. Epoxy coated cast iron body with bottom outlet. Seepage pan and combination
membrane flashing clamp and frame for heavy duty cast iron loose slotted grate with suspended
sediment bucket.

M Roof Drain (RD-1) : Elevated cast iron dome with Dura-coated cast iron body with membrane
flashing clamp, gravel guard and perforated stainless steel extension. ZURN Model Z-107

SECTION 15150 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 4/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

N Parapet Angle Drain : ZURN MODEL : Z-187 Parapet angle epoxy coated cast iron body with
reversible back or bottom outlet. Oblique grate with 90 degrees or 45 degrees combination frame
and membrane flashing clamp.

O Balcony Drain : ZURN MODEL : Z-158 Balcony drain epoxy coated cast iron body with 90 degrees
or 45 degrees outlet and flush type strainer with combination frame and membrane flashing clamp.

P Balcony Angle Type Drain : ZURN MODEL : Z-189 Scupper drain epoxy coated cast iron body with
90 degrees or 45 degrees outlet and flush type strainer with combination frame and membrane
flashing clamp.

Q RD-5 : Roof Scupper With Down Spout : ZURN MODEL : Z-198 Scupper drain epoxy coated cast
iron body with 90 degrees or 45 degrees outlet and flush type strainer with combination frame and
membrane flashing clamp. Use parapet scupper sleeve with bronze downspout nozzle.

2.10 CLEANOUTS

A Ground cleanout: Heavy duty cast iron ZURN 21400-3 or approved equal.

B Floor cleanout in toilet: PVC with chrome - plated bronze cover.

2.11 SEWAGE EJECTORS

A Type: Vertical centrifugal, direct connected, duplex arrangement.

B Casing: Cast iron volute with radial clearance around impeller.

C Impeller: Bronze; open non-clog for drainage handling and grinder type for sewage handling, keyed
to stainless steel shaft.

D Support: Cast iron pedestal motor support on steel floor plate with gas tight gaskets.

E Bearings: Forced grease lubricated bronze sleeve spaced maximum 1200 mm and grease
lubricated ball thrust at floor plate.

F Drive: Flexible coupling to vertical, solid shaft ball bearing electric motor.

G Sump: Steel cover plate on sump basin, with inspection opening and cover, and alarm fittings.

H Controls (Simplex): Float switch with float rod, stops, and corrosion resistant float, and separate
pressure switch high level alarm with transformer, alarm bell and stand-pipe.

I Controls (Duplex): Float operated mechanical alternator with float rod, stops, and corrosion
resistant float to alternate operation of pumps. Cut-in second pump on rising level or lead pump
failure. Provide separate pressure switch high level alarm with transformer, alarm bell, and
standpipe, and extra set of wired terminals for remote alarm circuit, and emergency float switch
with float rod, stops, and corrosion resistant float to operate both pumps on failure of alternator.

J Performance: (refer to drawings)

2.12 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE EJECTORS

A Type: Completely submersible, vertical, centrifugal.

B Casing: Bronze pump body and oil filled motor chamber.

C Impeller: Bronze; open non-clog for drainage handling and grinder type for sewage handling,
keyed to stainless steel shaft

D Bearings: Ball bearings.

E Sump

SECTION 15150 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 5/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

F Accessories: Oil resistant 2 m cord and plug with three-prong connector, for connection to electric
wiring system including grounding connector.

G Servicing: Slide-away coupling consisting of discharge elbow secure to sump floor, movable
bracket, guide pipe system, lifting chain and chain hooks.

H Controls: Motor control panel containing across-the-line electric motor starters with ambient
compensated quick trip overloads in each phase with manual trip button and reset button, circuit
breaker, control transformer, electro-mechanical alternator, hand-off-automatic selector switches,
pilot lights, high water alarm pilot light, reset button and alarm horn. Provide mercury switch liquid
level controls, steel shell switch encased in polyurethane foam with cast iron weight for pump on
(each pump), pump off (common), and alarm.

I Performance: (refer to drawings)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavate

3.2 PREPARATION

A Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A Fixed points must be provided at a maximum of 5 meter intervals and/or changes in direction.
Intermediate sliding supports must be provided in accordance with the manufacturer application
technique manual.

B All components of the system to be installed strictly in accordance with the applicable code of
gravity drainage systems inside buildings and recommendation of manufacturer.

C All operatives to be trained in welding and jointing techniques by the manufacturer.

D Install Work in accordance with Public Works standards.

E Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture
of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for snaking drainage system.

F Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

G Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

H Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

I Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

J Install piping to maintain headroom. Do not spread piping, conserving space.

K Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

L Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.

M Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation
and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15080.

N Provide access where valves and fittings are not expose.

O Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than the requirement
cover shown on the drawings.

SECTION 15150 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 6/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

P Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

Q Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

R Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
Refer to Section 09900.

S Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 02200.

T Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

U Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.

V Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.

2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.

3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 100
mm.

4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt
with recessed square steel plate and nut above, flush with top of, recessed into and
grouted flush with, slab.

W Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASTM B31.9, ASTM F708, and, MSS SP89.

2. Support horizontal piping as schedule

3. Install hangers to provide minimum 15 mm space between finished covering and adjacent
work.

4. Place hangers within 300 mm of each horizontal elbow.

5. Use hangers with 40 mm minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

6. Support vertical piping at every other, floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.

7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.

8. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09900. Hangers and
supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not
considered expose

9. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to
Section

10. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.

X Pumps:

1. Ensure shaft length allows ejector pumps to be located minimum 600 mm below lowest
invert into sump pit and minimum 150 mm clearance from bottom of sump pit.

2. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.

3. Provide line sized isolating valve on suction and line sized soft seated check valve and
balancing valve on discharge.

SECTION 15150 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 7/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

4. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping
adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under
elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 100 mm and over.

5. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation, do not overload in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25
percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1% percent minimum. Maintain gradients.

3.5 SCHEDULES

METAL-PIPE HANGER SPACING:

A Pipe size: 15 to 32 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 2 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 9 mm.

B Pipe size: 40 to 50 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 9 mm.

C Pipe size: 65 to 75 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 13 mm.

D Pipe size: 100 to 150 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 15 mm.

E Pipe size: 200 to 300 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 4.25 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 22 mm.

F Pipe size: 350 mm and Over:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 6 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 25 mm.

3.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. The work shall be inspected and tested during installation of agreed stages. All work which will be
concealed shall be tested before it is finally enclosed.

B. Work to be inspected regularly by the manufacturer who is to verify compliance with manufacturer’s
installation guidelines and recommendations.

C. A final test shall be made upon completion for soundness and performance in accordance with
Code of Practice for the testing of Sanitary Pipework.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15150 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 8/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15160

STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes pipe, pipe fittings, connections and equipment for storm water piping systems.
This Section also includes roof and floor-drains and cleanouts.

B Related Sections:

1. Section 03110 – Concrete Forms and Accessories: Execution requirements for placement
of inserts and sleeves specified by this section.

2. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of

concrete specified by this section.

3. Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting material
specified by this section.

4. Section 15075 – Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for pipe identification for
placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

B ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

C ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

D CISPI 301 - (Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute) Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron
Sanitary Systems.

E ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

F ASME A112.21.1 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Floor Drains.

G ASME A112.21.2 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Roof Drains.

H MSS SP58 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Pipe
Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer

I MSS SP89 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Pipe
Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

J The factory assembled major r equipments shall be UL listed or certified CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes for sump-
pumps, catch basins and manholes.

C Product Data: Submit Provide data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes,
and finishes. Provide pump type, capacity, certified pump curves showing pump performance
characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when
applicable. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for all material and
equipment.

SECTION 15160 – STORM DRAINAGE 1/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

E Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.

C Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for all pumps
and equipment.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Perform Work in accordance with Public Works standard.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented experience.

B Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented, experience.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of
the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.11 WARRANTY

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide one year manufacturer warranty for storm drainage piping.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 1500 mm OF BUILDING

A Pipes and fittings HDPE manufactured to DIN 19535, DIN 19537, DIN 8074, DIN 8075 fittings to
carry a BBA certificate No. 92/2796. – (Geberit HDPE or approved equal)

All materials should be manufactured under a BS 5750 / ISO 9000 approved scheme, and shall be
covered by a manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Fittings: HDPE

SECTION 15160 – STORM DRAINAGE 2/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2. Joints: All pipes and fittings to be fusion welded by either electro sleeve coupling or butt
weld.

B Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy, service, weight.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.

2. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum.

C PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D303

1. Fittings: PVC

2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.3 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A Pipes and fittings HDPE manufactured to DIN 19535, DIN 19537, DIN 8074, DIN 8075 fittings to
carry a BBA certificate No. 92/2796. – (Geberit HDPE or approved equal)

All materials should be manufactured under a BS 5750 / ISO 9000 approved scheme, and shall be
covered by a manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Fittings: HDPE

2. Joints: All pipes and fittings to be fusion welded by either electro sleeve coupling or butt
weld.

B Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy, service, weight.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.

2. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum.

C PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785 Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241 SDR-26 for not less than 1034 kPa
pressure rating.

1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, PVC.

2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 Solvent cement.

2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A Drain, Waste, and Vent: Conform to ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP89,.

B Hangers for Pipe Sizes 15 to 40 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

C Hangers for Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

D Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

E Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 80 mm: Cast iron hook.

F Wall Support for Pipe Sizes Over 100 mm: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

G Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

H Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or
steel support.

2.5 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS

A General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant: Water based, non-slumping, premixed sealant with
intumescent properties, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

B General Purpose Vibration Resistant Fire Stopping Sealant: Silicone based, non-slumping,
premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours
per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

SECTION 15160 – STORM DRAINAGE 3/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.6 EXTERIOR FLOOR DRAINS

A Roof Drain : ANSI A112.21.1; cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes,
and round, adjustable dome strainer or angle type as required.

2.7 EXTERIOR PLANTER DRAINS

A ANSI A112.21.2; lacquered, galvanized, cast iron body with sump.

B Strainer: Removable cast iron dome with stainless steel screen.

C Accessories: Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stops.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A Fixed points must be provided at a maximum of 5 meter intervals and/or changes in direction.
Intermediate sliding supports must be provided in accordance with the manufacturer application
technique manual.

B All components of the system to be installed strictly in accordance with the applicable code of
gravity drainage systems inside buildings and recommendation of manufacturer.

C All operatives to be trained in welding and jointing techniques by the manufacturer.

D Install Work in accordance with Public Works standards.

E Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

F Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

G Install piping to maintain headroom. Group piping to conserve space.

H Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

I Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.

J Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation
and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15080.

K Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access
doors with Section 08310.

L Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 1m of cover.

M Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

N Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

SECTION 15160 – STORM DRAINAGE 4/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

O Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
Refer to Section 09900.

P Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

Q Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.

R Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.

2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.

3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 100
mm.

4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt
with recessed square steel plate and nut above, flush with top of, recessed into and
grouted flush with, slab.

S Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASTM F708 and MSS SP89.

2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

3. Install hangers to provide minimum 15 mm space between finished covering and adjacent
work.

4. Place hangers within 300 mm of each horizontal elbow.

5. Use hangers with 40 mm minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

6. Support vertical piping at every other, floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.

7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.

8. Provide sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping.

9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09900. Hangers and
supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not
considered exposed.

10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to
Section

11. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to one percent minimum. Maintain gradients.

3.5 SCHEDULES

METAL-PIPE HANGER SPACING:

A Pipe size: 15 to 32 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 2 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 9 mm.

SECTION 15160 – STORM DRAINAGE 5/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

B Pipe size: 40 to 50 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 9 mm.

C Pipe size: 65 to 75 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 13 mm.

D Pipe size: 100 to 150 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 15 mm.

E Pipe size: 200 to 300 mm:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 4.25 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 22 mm.

F Pipe size: 350 mm and Over:

1. Maximum hanger spacing: 6 m.

2. Hanger rod diameter: 25 mm.

3.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. The work shall be inspected and tested during installation of agreed stages. All work which will be
concealed shall be tested before it is finally enclosed.

B. Work to be inspected regularly by the manufacturer who is to verify compliance with manufacturer’s
installation guidelines and recommendations.

C. A final test shall be made upon completion for soundness and performance in accordance with
Code of Practice for the testing of Sanitary Pipework.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15160 – STORM DRAINAGE 6/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15190

FUEL SYSTEM PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes piping, fittings, valves, fuel oil pumps and tanks for fuel piping systems, LPG
system and gas supply for kitchen.

B Related Sections:

1. Section 02200 –Earthworks: Product requirements for underground piping and tanks for
placement by this section.

2. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Product requirements for concrete ballast and fill
pads for underground tank for placement by this section.

3. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Product requirements for painting for placement by
this section.

4. Section 15075 – Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for valve and pipe
identification for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A API 650 (American Petroleum Institute) - Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage.

B API 1615 (American Petroleum Institute) - Installation of Underground Petroleum Storage Systems.

C API 1632 (American Petroleum Institute) - Cathodic Protection of Underground Petroleum Storage
Tanks and Piping Systems.

D API 2000 (American Petroleum Institute) - Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure Storage Tanks.

E ASME SEC IX (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

F ASME B16.3 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.

G ASME B31.9 - Building Service Piping.

H ASME B36.10 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel
Pipe.

I ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

J ASTM D4021 - Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Underground Petroleum Storage Tanks.

K AWS A5.8 (American Welding Society) - Brazing Filler Metal.

L NACE RP-01-69 (NACE International) - Control of External Corrosion on Underground or

Submerged Piping Systems.

M NACE RP-02-85 (NACE International) - Control of External Corrosion on Metallic Buried, Partially
Buried or Submerged Liquid Storage Systems.

N NFPA 30 (National Fire Protection Association) - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.

O NFPA 31 (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Oil Burning Equipment.

P NFPA 54 (National Fire Protection Association) - National Fuel Gas Code.

Q NFPA 58 (National Fire Protection Association) - Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum
Gases.

R UL 1316 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Underground Tanks for

Petroleum Products.

SECTION 15190 – FUEL SYSTEM PIPING 1/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

S The factory assembled major r equipments shall be UL listed or certified CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Shop Drawings: Indicate tanks, system layout, pipe sizes, location, and elevations. For fuel oil
tanks, indicate dimensions and accessories including manholes and hold down straps.

C Product Data: Submit data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

D Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit oil pump data.

E Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, piping system, storage tanks, and
system components.

C Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded
assembly views.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Perform Work in accordance with ASME SEC IX and NFPA 30 and NFPA 58 and Public Work's
standard.

B Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Contractor is responsible to coordinate and re-confirm fuel system design, equipment ratings and
controls, based on the Genset manufacturer’s recommendations and as per the applicable codes.

B. All work shall be executed strictly as per approved installation drawings coordinated with
manufacturers / suppliers recommendations and with all the disciplines.

C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented experience.

D. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C Protect piping and fittings from soil and debris with temporary end caps and closures. Maintain in
place until installation. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

SECTION 15190 – FUEL SYSTEM PIPING 2/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.11 WARRANTY

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide ten years manufacturer warranty for pumps and valves excluding packing.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B Supply two packing kits for each size valve.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 BURIED OIL PIPING

A Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black.

1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel welding type.

2. Joints: ANSI B31.9 welded.

3. Jacket: AWWA C105 polyethylene or double layer, half-lapped 0.25 mm polyethylene

tape.

2.3 ABOVE GROUND OIL PIPING

A Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or ASME B36.10 Schedule 40 black.

1. Fittings: ASTM B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M wrought carbon steel and
alloy steel welding type.

2. Joints: NFPA 30, welded to ANSI B31.9.

2.4 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 80 black.

1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M forged steel welding type.

2. Joints: NFPA 54, welded to ANSI B31.1.

2.5 LPG GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 80 black.

1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M forged steel welding type.

2. Joints: NFPA 58, welded to ANSI B31.9.

2.6 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A Pipe Size 50 mm and Under:

1. Ferrous pipe: 1034 kPa malleable iron threaded unions.

B Pipe Size Over 50 mm:

1. Ferrous pipe: 1034 kPa forged steel slip-on flanges; 1.6 mm thick preformed neoprene
gaskets.

2.7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

SECTION 15190 – FUEL SYSTEM PIPING 3/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Conform to NFPA 31, ANSI B31.1.

B Hangers for Pipe Sizes 15 to 40 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

C Hangers for Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

D Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

E Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 80 mm: Cast iron hook.

F Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

G Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or
steel support.

2.8 BALL VALVES

A MSS SP-110, Class 150, 2760 kPa CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball,
regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing
stops, solder ends.

2.9 SWING CHECK VALVES

A Up to 2 inches: MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc, solder ends.

B 50 mm and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc seal and
seat, flanged ends.

2.10 RELIEF VALVES

A Bronze body, Teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated at maximum
400 kPa, UL listed for fuel oil and capacities ASME certified and labeled.

2.11 STRAINERS

A Threaded brass body for 1200 kPa CWP Class 150, threaded bronze body 2070 kPa CWP, Y
pattern with 0.8 mm stainless steel perforated screen.

2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A Bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleeve, suitable for minimum 1380 kPa CWP and 121
degrees C.

2.13 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS

A General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant: Water based, non-slumping, premixed sealant with
intumescent properties, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

B General Purpose Vibration Resistant Fire Stopping Sealant: Silicone based, non slumping,
premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours
per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

2.14 FUEL STORAGE TANKS

A Steel Tank: Tank to be cylindrical with fixed long radius convex ends, fabricated from 4mm thick
high quality black steel plate welded on both internal and external seams

Hydrostatically test tank at factory to pressure of one atmosphere held for 24 hours. All welds to be
proven sound.

Manhole to be 500mm diameter on top of tank, constructed from 6mm thick side, flange and cover
welded to tank. Cover to be fixed to flange with 1.5mm thick ring gasket and 20mm diameter
machine bolts 40mm long with nuts equally spaced around 600mm diameter bolt circle.

Connections: tank to have necessary female threaded connections comprised of black forged steel
pipe couplings fitted through holes cut in tank and welded all around inside and outside tank.

SECTION 15190 – FUEL SYSTEM PIPING 4/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Connections made to top of tank, except vent connection, are to be extended down to within
150mm of tank bottom with seamless black steel pipes of same size as connections and well
braced to tank inside walls. Vent connection is not to extend more than 20mm into tank.
Paint Finish: tank, manhole and connections to be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, slag, oil,
grease and all foreign matter by sand blasting or wire brushing down to base metal and painted on
outside only with two coats of zinc chromate primer and two coats of emulsified asphalt. The over
all finishing should be capable of resisting 2500 volts.

B Filler Cap: 100 mm watertight brass with lock, recessed box and cover.

C Gage: Remote reading, electronic, for two wire, 24 volt power, with wall mounted direct reading
gage.

D Cathodic Protection: API 1632, Galvanic type with sacrificial magnesium anodes welded to tank.

E Size and Capacity: As shown on drawings.

F Tank Fittings:

1. Fill: 100mm

2. Vent: 75mm, back steel including "T" and elbow assembly with 6 mm flame arrestor.

3. Suction: 65mm anti-siphon connection to tank bottom with foot valve.

4. Return: 65mm

5. Gage fitting 65mm

6. Connections: UL 567, dielectric bushings.

G Man-way: 550mm diameter, with cover and gasket, and extension sleeve; located at top of tank.

H Leak Detector System: to the approval of the Engineer.

2.15 DAILY FUEL TANKS

A Tank: welded steel, with steel support saddles, taps for accessories, threaded connections.

B Accessories: Tank fill, gage, vent, and outlet connections.

C Gage: Remote reading, electronic, for two wire, 24 volt power, with wall mounted direct reading
gage.

D Size and Capacity: As shown on drawings.

2.16 FUEL OIL PUMPS (END SUCTION TYPE)

A Casing: Submersible Bronze, UL listed explosion proof, rated for 860 kPa working pressure with
integral pressure relief valve.

B Impeller: Bronze gears, positive displacement.

C Drive: Direct connected with flexible coupling.

D Accessories: Adjustable pressure control valve, bleed valve, mechanical seal.

E Performance of fuel pumps shall be as indicated on drawings.

2.17 TRANSFER SYSTEM

A System: Float valves and relays to automatically energize pumps to fill day tank from main storage
tank.

1. Low level: Energize pumps when tank level drops below 33 percent of full volume.

2. Full level: De-energize pumps when full.

3. Alarm: Sound audible alarm when fuel overflows into return.

SECTION 15190 – FUEL SYSTEM PIPING 5/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

4. Fill level indicator and its level alarm installed near the fill point of the Bulk Fuel Storage
Tank.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D Excavate and Backfill in accordance with Section 02200.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A Install Work in accordance with Local Applicable standards.

B Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. Install to NACE
RP-01-69.

C Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.

D Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

E Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.

G Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

H Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access
doors with Section 08310.

I Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 1.00 m of cover.

J Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, weld,
and apply one coat of zinc rich primer.

K Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.

L Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weatherproof hood.

M Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not pre-finished, ready for finish painting. Refer to
Section 09900.

N Identify piping systems including underground piping. Refer to Section 15075.

O Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

P Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of
the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

Q Provide valves gas service complete with gas cylinder hose pipe and regulators. Gas service
distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure as indicated on the drawings. Provide
regulators on each line serving gravity type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment.

3.4 FUEL TANK INSTALLATION

A Install tanks in accordance with and API 1615.

B Clean and flush tanks after installation. Seal until pipe connections are made.

SECTION 15190 – FUEL SYSTEM PIPING 6/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

C Install tanks on concrete ballast pad with mass equal to tank capacity, and secure with hold-down
straps and turnbuckles.

D Backfill tanks with sand, as shown in drawing and specified in Section 02200. Do not bed on
timbers, beams, or cradles.

E Provide piping connections to tanks with unions and swing joints. Provide venting to API 2000.

F Extend fill line and cover to grade and provide minimum 600 x 600 x 150 mm concrete pad.

G Mount aboveground tanks on steel support saddles and stands as indicated.

I Clean and flush day tank after installation. Seal until pipe connections are made.

J Fill tanks at Project turnover with appropriate fuel.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15190 – FUEL SYSTEM PIPING 7/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15300

FIRE PROTECTION (PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. The Work under this section shall include providing all materials, labors and plants to furnish and
install fire extinghuishing system as shown on the drawing and specified herein.

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. ANSI - American National Standard Institute:

B1.20.1 Pipe Threads.

B16.1 Cast Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.

B16.3 Malleable-Iron screwed Fittings 150 and 300 Pound.

B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials:

A53 Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.

A120 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded and
Seamless, for Ordinary Uses.

C. NFPA- National Fire Protection Association:

10 Portable Fire Extinguishers.

13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

14 Standpipe and Hose Systems.

20 Fire Protection Equipment.

1961 Fire Hose.

1963 Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections.

D. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

299 Dry-Chemical Fire Extinguishers.

711 Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Material and equipment information: Shall include catalogue cuts and technical data for each
component or device used in the system.

B. The contractor shall provide information outlining the operation and maintenance procedures that
will be required by the Employer.

C. Sequence of operation, electrical schematics and connection diagrams be provided.

D. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall indicate locations, installation details and operation details of
all equipment associated with the fire protection systems.

E. Certification and Guarantees:

1. Manufacturer's Guarantees for all proprietary equipment in brochures.

2. Certificate of Compliance.

SECTION 15300 – FIRE PROTECTION (PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER) 1/2

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3. Test Reports.

F Operation and Maintenance Instructions:

1. For all proprietary equipment and assemblies.

2. Valve Identification Brochure.

1.4 WARRANTY:

A. The Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee covering the satisfactory operation of the fire
protection system in all its parts for a period of one (1) year after date of acceptance. During this
period, the Contractor shall periodically service, repair, maintain or replace any defective work and
pay for any repair or replacement costs.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. All the work specified in this section shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions
of the following codes and standard:

1. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM)

2. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Supply and install all portable fire extinguishers wherever shown on the Drawings and as specified herein:

A (FE-2) - Portable fire extinguishers, CO2

1. Carbon dioxide type of 6 kgs capacity.

2. Heavy duty drawn steel cylinder with hard scratch-resistant, enamel finish with colour as
per International fire regulations colour code for CO2.

3. Pull-pin, squeeze handle, double braided hose and non-conducting discharge horn.

4. Wall hanger and bracket.

B (FE-1) - Portable fire extinguishers, dry chemical

1. Minimum of 70% mono ammonium phosphate concentration dry chemical "ABC" type of 6
kgs capacity.

2. Heavy duty drawn steel cylinder with hard, scratch-resistant red enamel finish.

3. All brass operating valve, large size operating lever, full vision pressure gauge and
discharge hose.

4. Wall hanger and bracket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Installation shall be made in accordance with the SASO and applicable National Fire Protection
Association Standards. All equipment and devices used shall be listed in either the UL Fire
Protection List or the Factory Mutual Approval Guide.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 15300 – FIRE PROTECTION (PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER) 2/2

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15320

FIRE PUMPS

PART- 1. GENERAL:

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The work under this section consists of furnishings, installation, commissioning and start-up
to the satisfaction of the Consultants and the local authority the fire pumps / jockey pumps
and the control as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirement.

B. Section 15070 Mechanical Sound Vibration and Seismic

C. Section 15075 Mechanical Identification

D. Section 15080 Mechanical Insulation.

E. Section 15325 Sprinkler System

F. Division 16 Electrical Specification

1.3 REFERENCES:

A. Factory Mutual System (FM) - Approval Guide.

B. NEMA MG-1 - Motors and Generators.

C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum).

D. NFPA 20 - Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps.

E. NFPA 24 - Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances.

F. NFPA 37 - Installation and use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines.

G. UL - Fire Protection Equipment Directory.

H. UL 448 - Pumps for Fire Protection Service.

I. UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps.

J. UL 1247 - Diesel Engines for Driving Centrifugal Fire Pumps.

K. UL 1478 - Fire Pump Relief Valves.

SECTION 15320 – FIRE PUMPS 1/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.4 SUBMITTALS.

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, general assembly, components, dimensions, weights,

clearances and methods of assembly.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers literature including general assembly, pump curves
showing performance characteristics with pump and system, operating point indicated,
NPSH curve, controls, wiring diagrams, and service connections.

C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instruction: Indicate support details, connection requirement, and

include start-up instructions for fire pump systems.

D. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that fire pumps meet or exceed specified requirements at
specified operating conditions. Submit summary and results of shop tests performed in
accordance with NFPA 20.

E. Field Reports: Indicated summary of hydrostatic test and field acceptance tests performed
in accordance with NFPA 20.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA:

A. Operation Data: Include manufacturers instructions, start-up data, trouble-shooting check

lists, for pumps, drivers and controllers.

B. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers literature, cleaning procedures, replacement

parts lists, and repair data for pumps, drivers and controllers.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE.

A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 20.

B. Equipment and Components. Bear UL label or marking.

C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.

A. Accept fire pumps and components on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage. Comply
with manufacturers rigging and installation instructions.

B. Protect fire pumps and components from physical damage including effects of weather,
water and construction debris.

C. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps and maintain in place until installation.

1.8 WARRANTY.

A. Provide one year manufacture warranty effective from substantial completion of all
equipment and products supplied under provision of Section 1510.

1.9 GUARANTEE.

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the full installation for one year from substantial completion.

SECTION 15320 – FIRE PUMPS 2/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

B. The guarantee shall cover materials and labour for the complete system as covered in
Section 15010.

1.10 QUALIFICATIONS.

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of Section with minimum five years
experience.

B. System design shall be under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in

design of this work and licensed by the Local Civil Defense Department.

C. All works related to fire protection systems shall be carried out by reputable fire protection
company approved by Civil Defense, pre-qualification of fire protection company shall be
submitted for approval.

D. Fire protection company shall submit shop drawings and calculation strictly as per NFPA-13
for the sprinkler system, for review and approval of Engineer.

E. Wet pipe sprinkler system shall be designed, installed, tested and certified in accordance
with NFPA-13 and 25 and requirements of the Local Civil Defense.

F. Installation, testing and commissioning, and operation and maintenance of fire protection
system shall be strictly in accordance with applicable codes of NFPA Section 13, 14, 20, 22,
24 and 25 and requirements of civil Defense.

G. All ceiling void exceeding 1.2 m height shall also be provided with the sprinklers.

H. Type of sprinkler selection shall be coordinated with the type of area served and Interior
Design requirements.

I. Areas where wet pipe sprinkler system is not applicable as per NFPA Code shall be
protected by alternate Fire Protection System as per applicable NFPA Code.

1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS.

A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of authority
having jurisdiction or fire marshall and Owner’s fire insurance underwriter.

PART-2 PRODUCTS:

2.1 MAIN PUMPS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. The fire pump, driver controller, and related accessories shall all be furnished by the pump
manufacturer. The pumping unit shall be listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories Inc. (UL), and
/or approved by Factory Mutual Research Corp. (FM). The pumping unit shall also meet the
requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, pamphlet No. 20 (NFPA 20), and
be acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

B. The fire pump shall deliver not less than 150% of the rated capacity at a pressure not less
than 65% of the rated head. The shut-off head shall not exceed 140% of the rated head.

C. The pump shall be a bronze fitted centrifugal pump mounted on a common baseplate with
the pump driver complete with coupling and coupling guard .

SECTION 15320 – FIRE PUMPS 3/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.2 FIRE PUMPS.

A. Horizontal In-line Pumps.

1. Type: UL 448 horizontal single stage, vertical split casing flexible coupling for up
to 250 psig (1720 kPa).

2. Casing: Cast or ductile iron with suction and discharge gage ports, drain plug
flanged suction and discharge.

3. Impeller: Bronze double suction fully enclosed, balanced and keyed to shaft.

4. Bearings: Grease Lubricated ball bearings .

5. Shaft: Alloy Steel or bronze.

6. Seal : Bronze Packing glands.

7. Drive Flexible coupling with coupling guard.

8. Guard Baseplate: Fabricated steel with integral drain rim.

B. Horizontal Base Mounted Pumps.

1. Type: UL 448 and UL 778 approved, horizontal shaft, single stage, double suction,
direct connected, horizontally split casing, for 250 psig (1720 kPa) maximum
working pressure.

2. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing
wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.

3. Impeller: Bronze double suction fully enclosed, balanced and keyed to shaft.

4. Bearings: Grease lubricated ball bearings, replaceable without opening casing.

5. Shaft: Alloy steel with replaceable bronze shaft sleeve.

6. Seal : Packing gland with minimum four rings graphite impregnated packing and
bronze lantern rings, 230 degrees F (110 degrees C) maximum continuous
operating temperature.

7. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard.

8. Baseplate: Fabricated steel with integral drain rim.

C. Fire Pump Accessories:

The following accessories shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer, those subjected to
the pump discharge pressure shall be rated to 250 PSI to ANSI B 16.1 for pressure
operation.

SECTION 15320 – FIRE PUMPS 4/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Eccentric suction reducer and OS&Y gate or butterfly valve on suction side of
pump.

2. Concentric increaser and check valve in pump discharge and OS&Y gate or
butterfly valve on system side of check valve.

3. Fire pump bypass fitted with OS&Y gate or butterfly valves and check valve.

4. Main relief valve, UL 1478, and enclosed type waste cone.

5. Suction pressure gage, 4 1/2 inch (110 mm) diameter dial with snubber, valve cock
and lever handle.

6. Discharge pressure gage mounted on board attached to pump, with snubber, valve
cock and lever handle.

7. Casing 3/4 inch (20 mm) relief valve.

8. Float operated one inch(25 mm) automatic air release valve.

9. Hose valve manifold with 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) hose gate valves with caps and
chains.

10. Flow metering system for closed loop testing.

2.3 ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE:

A. Motor : Squirrel cage induction type; in open drip proof NEMA MG-1 enclosure.

B. Controller: Limited service type with reduced voltage starter, in ANSI/NEMA 250 enclosure,
including the following:

1. Disconnect Switch: Externally operable, quick break type.

2. Circuit Breaker: Trips in each phase calibrated at least to 300% of the motor full-
load current, 10,000 amperes interrupting capacity.
3. Motor Starter: Energized automatically through pressure switch or manually by
externally operable handle.
4. Pressure Switch: Set to cut in as set by design.
5. Running Period Timer: Keeps motor in operation when started automatically, for a
minimum of seven minutes.
6. Pilot Lamp: Indicates circuit breaker closed and power available.
7. Ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs.
8. Alarm Relay: Energizes alarm to indicate circuit breaker open or power failure.
9. Remote start switch relay.
10. Manual Selector Station: On enclosure marked “Automatic” and “Non-Automatic.”

2.4 DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE:

A. Diesel Engine: Conform to NFPA 1247, arranged for automatic operation and include
overspeed/overcrank switch and drive, two contactor switches, low oil pressure and high
water temperature warning switches, and fuel shut-off solenoid, with wiring terminating in
junction box.

B. Include following engine accessories:

SECTION 15320 – FIRE PUMPS 5/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Stub Shaft
2. Oil bath air cleaner
3. Water cooled exhaust manifold
4. Heat exchanger
5. Mechanical speed governor
6. Fuel filter
7. Lube oil filter and by-pass valve
8. Lube oil cooler and relief valve
9. Fuel pump
10. Instrument panel with tachometer, hour meter, oil pressure gage, water
temperature gage, ammeter, hand speed control and start switch.
11. Starting system including generator/alternator, starting motor and voltage regulator.
12. Exhaust silencer, residential type.
13. Flexible exhaust tubing 24 inches (600 mm) long.

C. Cooling water system: Closed system with cooling water supply to heat exchanger from fire
pump discharge. Include four (4) manual shut-off valves including by-pass line, two
strainers, pressure regulating valve, automatic solenoid valve and pressure gage.

D. Storage batteries: Dual lead acid batteries with cables and battery racks.

E. Fuel system: 250 gallon (1000 liter) above ground storage tank fill pipe and cap, manual
shut-off valve, flame arrestor, oil level gage, braided bronze flexible connectors, seamless
type K copper tubing with flared joints.

F. Automatic diesel engine controller: Enclosed in floor mounted 14 gage (1.8 mm) steel
housing. UL listed and labelled.

1. Controller: Function to automatically start fire pump from water pressure control
switch or test switch.

2. Stop push button: To manually stop engine.

3. Automatic conditions: Controller shall alternate batteries automatically on each 15

second cranking cycle. Alarm if engine not started after six attempts.

4. Battery charger: Dual, built-in, to recharge both batteries within 24 hour period,
with automatic overload protection (current limiting), individual voltmeters and
ammeters for each battery.

5. Individual pilot lights and common alarm bell for:

a. Low Engine Oil Pressure

b. High Engine Jacket Water Temperature

c. Failure to Start Automatically

d. Charger Failure

e. Battery 1 Failure

f. Battery 2 Failure
g. Overspeed Shutdown

SECTION 15320 – FIRE PUMPS 6/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

G. Remote Alarm and Single Panel: Provide wall mounted panel in NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with:

1. Engine running light.

2. Common engine failure light for:

a. Low Engine Oil Pressure

b. High Engine Jacket Water Temperature

c. Failure to Start Automatically

d. Charger Failure

e. Battery 1 Failure

f. Battery 2 Failure

g. Overspeed Shutdown

3. Power on light

4. Switch off light indicating position of main control switch

2.5 PRESSURE BOOSTER (JOCKEY) PUMP:

A. Electrically operated, horizontal turbine close-coupled type with standard open drip-proof
horizontal motor.

B. Control by automatic jockey pump controller with full voltage starter and minimum run timer
to start pump on pressure drop in system and stay in operation for minimum period of time.
Fire pump shall start automatically on further pressure drop or on jockey pump failure.

PART-3 EXECUTION:

3.1 INSTALLATION.

A. Supply install and test pumps of capacities as shown on drawings. Pumps shall be mounted
on floating isolation base as specified under section 15070.

B. Pump/Motor assembly shall be aligned and balanced, the balancing shall be verified after
installation using chimes, and grout base plate to provide a rigid non-deflecting support.

C. Pipework shall be isolated.

D. Mount equipment on vibration isolators as specified under Section 15070.

E. Drains for packing glands and base shall be piped to nearest drain outlet.

F. Piping shall be supported adjacent to the pump such that no weight is carried on pump
casing .

SECTION 15320 – FIRE PUMPS 7/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

G. The pumps shall form a part of an assembly which will include but not limited to:

Main pumps, electric driven, or diesel driven and/or a combinations of electric/diesel set.
Starting gear, controls, batteries, battery charging equipment, pressure devices, tests
facilities, self priming facilities, exhaust and silencer systems, daily fuel tank, silencers,
exhaust ..etc., and all other requirements of the NFPA or British FOC rules as specified
herein-after.

H. The installation of the diesel engine drive to be to NFPA 37 and provide thimble at wall or
roof penetration.

I. Lubricate pumps and check and verify alignment before pump start-up.

J. Perform the hydrostatic flow test on the entire system in accordance with NFPA 20 to be
witnessed by the Consultants and authority having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15320 – FIRE PUMPS 8/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15325

SPRINKLER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL:

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work under this section consists of furnishing, installation, commissioning and testing to
the satisfaction of the Consultants and the local authority the following systems as shown on
the drawings and specified below.

1. Wet-pipe sprinkler system.

2. Dry-pipe sprinkler system.

3. Pre-action sprinkler system.

4. System design, installation and certification.

5. Fire department connections.

1.2 REFERENCES.

A. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

B. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or
equivalent authorities.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS.

A. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Requirements.

B. Section 15075 Mechanical Identification.

C. Section 15070 Vibration Isolation.

D. Section 15375 Standpipe and Hose System.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.

A. System coverage shall be as shown on the drawings.

B. Provide system to NFPA 13 ordinary hazard, Group 1 occupancy requirement unless specified
otherwise.

C. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system and BMS where available.

D. Provide fire department connections as indicated.

1.5 SUBMITTALS.

A. Preliminary Shop Drawings: Prior to detailed submission, submit preliminary layout of finished
ceiling areas indicating only head locations coordinated with ceiling installation.

SECTION 15325 – SPRINKLER SYSTEM 1/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports,
components and accessories. Indicate system controls.

C. Product Data: Provide data on sprinkler heads, valves, and specialties, including
manufacturers catalogue information. Submit performance ratings rough-in details, weights,
support requirements and piping connections.

D. Secure the approvals of the authority having jurisdiction and submit the proof of approval to the
Consultants.

E. Samples: Submit two of each style of sprinkler head specified.

F. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds the
specified requirements and the NFPA Code.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.

A. Record all site deviations to shop drawings and produce actual as-built record drawings as
detailed in Section 15010.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

A. Submit under provisions of Section 15050.

B. Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirement, record drawings,

inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability and location and numbers of
service depot.

1.8 WARRANTY.

A. Provide one year manufacture warranty effective from substantial completion of all equipment
and products supplied.

1.9 GUARANTEE.

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the full installation for one year from substantial completion.

B. The guarantee shall cover materials and labour for the complete system as covered in Section
15010.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE.

A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13.

B. Equipment and Components: Bear label and marking.

C. Maintain one copy of document on site.

1.11 QUALIFICATIONS.

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of Section with minimum five years
experience.

B. System design shall be under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in

design of this work and licensed by the Local Civil Defense Department.

SECTION 15325 – SPRINKLER SYSTEM 2/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

C. All works related to fire protection systems shall be carried out by reputable fire protection
company approved by Civil Defense, pre-qualification of fire protection company shall be
submitted for approval.

D. Fire protection company shall submit shop drawings and calculation strictly as per NFPA-13 for
the sprinkler system, for review and approval of Engineer.

E. Wet pipe sprinkler system shall be designed, installed, tested and certified in accordance with
NFPA-13 and 25 and requirements of the Local Civil Defense.

F. Installation, testing and commissioning, and operation and maintenance of fire protection
system shall be strictly in accordance with applicable codes of NFPA Section 13, 14, 20, 22,
24 and 25 and requirements of civil Defense.

G. All ceiling void exceeding 1.2 m height shall also be provided with the sprinklers.

H. Type of sprinkler selection shall be coordinated with the type of area served and Interior
Design requirements.

I. Areas where wet pipe sprinkler system is not applicable as per NFPA Code shall be protected
by alternate Fire Protection System as per applicable NFPA Code.

1.12 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS.

A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of authority having
jurisdiction or fire marshall and Owner’s fire insurance underwriter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only.
Contractor may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer
for the approval of the Engineer.

2.2 SPRINKLER HEAD.

A. Type of Sprinkler.

1. For those Mounted in false ceiling or side wall refer to ID drawings.

2. Upright type with guard for exposed areas.

B. Finish - Head & Escutcheon.

1. False ceiling - refer to ID drawings

2. Exposed area brass or chrome plated refer to ID drawings.

C.Fusible link: Glass Bulb Type.

D.Orifice size: Standard 1/2” and 17/32” are to be used.

E. Temperature rating: 170°F but where sprinklers are exposed to high temperature from equipment or
direct sunrays use 200°F

2.3 SPARE SPRINKLERS

SECTION 15325 – SPRINKLER SYSTEM 3/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Spare Sprinklers and escutcheons of each type shall be supplied and stored on the premises for
replacement. A minimum of six shall be allowed for the least used and twelve for those used
extensively.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES.

A. Wet pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to
automatically actuate electrically operated alarms, with pressure retard chamber and variable
pressure trim.

B. Dry Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check Type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to
automatically actuate electrically operated alarms, with accelerator.

C.Flooding Deluge Valve: Gate type valve with rubber faced disc actuated electrically with electrically
operated alarms, with alarm testing trim. Finish to I.D. approval.

D.Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminum alloy chrome plated
or red enameled gong and motor housing nylon bearings, and inlet strainer.

E. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated chrome plated or red enameled gong with pressure alarm
switch. Finish to I.D. approval.

F. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts rated 10
amp at 115 volt AC.

G. Excess Pressure Pump:

1. Type: Close coupled motor and pump unit.

2. Construction: Bronze with stainless steel shafts, carbon bearings.
3. Motor: Open drip proof, permanently lubricated
4. Accessories: Include flexible hose connections, inlet strainer, relief valve, and steel
mounting plate.
5. Operation: Automatic with pressure switch actuation.

H.Fire Department Connection: Siamese Connection.

1. Type: Flush mounted wall type or Free standing type with ductile iron pedestal as
shown on drawings.
2. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap
and chain of matching material and finish.
3. Drain: 3/4 inch (19 mm) automatic drip, connected to drain.
4. Label: “Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection”.
5. Finish to ID approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

3.1 INSTALLATION.

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instruction and NFPA 13.

B. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator.

SECTION 15325 – SPRINKLER SYSTEM 4/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

C.Provide double check valve assembly at sprinkler system water source connection

D.Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent
Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.

E. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated.

F. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.

G. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.

H.Center heads in ceiling tile with location variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with
ceiling elements.

I. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do not receive
field paint finish.

J. Install and connect fire pumps in accordance with section 15320 and NFPA 13.

K. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter, in accordance with section 15310.

L. Hydrostatically test entire system in accordance with section 15310

M. Require test be witnessed by authority having jurisdiction. and any party assigned by the
owner.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 15325 – SPRINKLER SYSTEM 5/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15365

FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. System Components

This specification covers the requirements for an automatic fixed fire suppression system using
FM-200 as the suppressant agent as indicated on the Contract Documents.

1. The FM-200 system shall be as manufactured by a manufacturer approved by the

Engineer. Major components of the detection system, cylinders, valves and releasing
devices shall be supplied by one manufacturer. Components shall be U.L. Listed and/or
F.M. Approved as compatible components of a system, particularly detection devices,
control panels, releasing devices, and signaling appliances.

2. Detection of products of combustion and fire shall be by devices U.L. Listed and F.M.
Approved.

3. Alarm signal, system supervision and agent releasing output shall be by a control panel
with battery stand-by U.L. Listed and F.M. Approved.

4. Release of FM-200 agent shall be accomplished by an electrical output from the control
panel to solenoid operated releasing devices and shall be in accordance with the
requirements set forth in the current edition of the National Fire Protection Association
Standard 2001 and Saudi Arabia Civil Defence Requirements.

B. Related Section :

Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements

Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification

Section 15325 - Sprinkler System

Division 16 - Electrical Specification

C. System Consideration and Requirements

In order to insure system effectiveness and client satisfaction, the Contractor shall engineer,
furnish, install, and test all the systems specified equipment and accessories for a complete
electrically supervised system as per NFPA Codes.

1. System Drawings

The Contractor shall prepare drawings showing the quantity, location, and marking of all
system components. Included shall be a description and routing of all piping. Computer
flow calculations shall detail pressure changes, flow rates, pipe and nozzle sizes. Care
should be taken to locate all agent storage containers as close to the protected area as
possible to insure complete liquid discharge of the suppressant agent within 10 seconds.
System electrical schematics and diagrams shall be provided, including a description of all
interlock functions. Four sets of all drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer and
appropriate authority having jurisdiction for approval prior to fabrication.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 2001

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) – Fire Protection Equipment Directory

C. Factory Mutual Insurance (FM) Approval Guide

D. Saudi Arabian Standards

SECTION 15365 – FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 1 / 10

 JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

E. All applicable local building codes, local fire department codes and regulations and Local
Authorities Housing Jurisdiction.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS.

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of Section with minimum five years experience.

B. System design shall be under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design
of this work and licensed by the Local Civil Defense Department.

C. All works related to fire protection systems shall be carried out by reputable fire protection company
approved by Civil Defense, pre-qualification of fire protection company shall be submitted for
approval.

D. Fire protection company shall submit shop drawings and calculation strictly as per NFPA-13 for the
sprinkler system, for review and approval of Engineer.

E. Wet pipe sprinkler system shall be designed, installed, tested and certified in accordance with
NFPA-13 and 25 and requirements of the Local Civil Defense.

F. Installation, testing and commissioning, and operation and maintenance of fire protection system
shall be strictly in accordance with applicable codes of NFPA Section 2001 and requirements of
civil Defense.

G. All ceiling void exceeding 1.2 m height shall also be provided with the sprinklers.

H. Type of sprinkler selection shall be coordinated with the type of area served and Interior Design
requirements.

I. Areas where wet pipe sprinkler system is not applicable as per NFPA Code shall be protected by
alternate Fire Protection System as per applicable NFPA Code.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS.

A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of authority having
jurisdiction or fire marshall and Owner’s fire insurance underwriter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. The FM-200 Fire Suppression System shall include a detection and control system with provision
for both pre-alarm and automatic agent release.

1. The detection and control system shall employ (photoelectric and ionization smoke
detectors (and) (heat detectors). A single detector activated shall cause an alarm signal
to be generated. A second detector activated shall generate a pre-discharge signal and
start the pre-discharge condition.

B. The suppressant sub-system shall provide high speed release of FM-200 based on the concept of
total flooding fire protection for enclosed areas. A uniform extinguishing concentration shall be
seven (7) percent concentration of FM-200 at 70 F.

1. FM-200 shall be stored in modular or central storage steel alloy storage containers
complying with D.O.T. Specification 4BA or 4BW and shall be equipped with differential
pressure valves. No replacement parts shall be necessary to recharge the FM-200
containers.

SECTION 15365 – FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 2 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2. FM-200 shall be discharged through the operation of a solenoid operated device which
releases the agent through a differential pressure valve. Systems which employ explosive
or pyrotechnic devices shall not be permitted. The maximum system discharge time shall
be in accordance with the NFPA Standard 2001 of 10 seconds, but not less than 6
seconds.

C. All system components shall be new and of current manufacture and shall be installed in
accordance with local codes.

D. All openings in walls of protected rooms shall be provided with fire dampers. All fire dampers shall
be electrically-operated and interlocked with the FM 200 system and fire detection system for
automatic closing in case of fire. Similarly, all electrically operated valves supplying combustible
liquids and gases to protected zone shall be interlocked with the FM-200 Control System

2.2 COMPONENTS:

A. Ionization of Smoke Detectors

The products of combustion detectors, ionization type, shall utilize solid state circuitry and be of the
dual chamber, bipolar configuration. One chamber shall be opened to sense particles of
combustion while the other will be used as a reference chamber for stability. The unit shall be
designed so as to be unaffected by RF and energy from 1 kHz through 1000 mHZ in a field
strength of up to 10 millivolts per meter. Ionization detectors which are designed such that
sensitivity decreases in the presence of air movement shall not be permitted. The detectors shall
also be unaffected by air velocities up to 1000 FPM.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors

The products of combustion detectors, photoelectric type, shall utilize solid state circuitry, a pulsed,
infrared, L.E.D. light source and a silicon photo diode receiving element. The receiving element will
normally not sense any light from the L.E.D. source. When smoke particles enter the sensing
chamber, the light source shall be reflected to the sensing element. Comparator circuitry shall be
used so as to discriminate between a valid "fire" signal and an intermittent "non-fire" source. The
entrance to the sensing chamber shall be surrounded by a fine stainless steel mesh so as to
prevent ready entry by insects, lint or dust. Unit shall be dew-proof and uninfluenced by high air
velocity.

C. The detector head shall be removable from its base for cleaning, service or replacement. The
detector shall be capable of having its calibration checked field. This same meter shall be capable
of checking field. This same meter shall be capable of checking ionization and photoelectric type
detectors. The detectors shall be Factory Mutual Approved and U.L. Listed to meet U.L. Standard
268.

D. Thermal Detector

The thermal detector shall be a rate-compensated fixed temperature type. The fixed temperature
setting shall be in accordance with NFPA 72E recommendations.

E. Manual Release

The manual release stations shall be located at major points of egress or as shown on drawings.
The manual release station shall provide a means of manually discharging the automatic fire
extinguishing system when used in conjunction with the control panel. The manual release switch
shall be the "dual action" type, to prevent accidental operation. The switch shall remain in the
operated position unit reset by means of a key.

F. Abort Stations

An abort switch will be provided at each exit point. Operation of the abort switch shall send a
"system aborted" indication to the panel when a fire condition exists. A separate "trouble"
indication shall result if the abort switch is operated when no alarm condition exists. Audible alarm
indications shall change when the abort switch is operated as an audible acknowledgment that the
control panel has received the abort signal. Abort switches shall be of the momentary "dead man"
type, and shall only inhibit discharge when held in the operated position.

G. Graphic Annunciator

A graphic annunciator panel shall be furnished by system manufacturer. Graphic annunciator shall
be U.L. Listed. The graphic annunciator will display all of the FM-200 zones and their respective
detectors. The enclosure size shall be determined by the installing Contractor.

SECTION 15365 – FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 3 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The graphic panels shall be of welded steel construction and be capable of being surface or flush
mounted as per Engineer’s Instrcutions. The panel shall have a hinged front door with a lock
provided.

The window shall be of clear Plexiglas mounted in an attractive metal frame. The graphic display
shall be silkscreened upon the Plexiglas. Graphic panels using other than silkscreening will not be
acceptable, unless the Client has specified provision for future modification. For this purpose, the
use of adhesive artwork, protected by a "sandwich" of dual plates of Plexiglas, will be acceptable.

Graphic annunciator shall be front lighted with individual L.E.D.'s. Graphic colors shall be
Approved prior to installation.

The graphic panel shall operate on 24 volt D.C. as specified. Internal electronics shall be solid
state, printed circuit design. The L.E.D. colors shall annunciate red for ceiling detectors and amber
for subfloor detectors, and shall be so designated on the face of the annunciator.

A key "lamp test" switch shall be provided.

H. Audible Alarm Devices

Upon entering the alarm mode, audible indication shall be supplied by the steady sounding of an
alarm electronic sounder. This unit shall be polarized for full supervision and U.L. Listed. It shall
have an output of 86-90 dBA to 10 feet at 24 VDC. The sounder shall be provided with a red finish.
All field wiring connections shall be made to terminal strips or wire leads on the device.

Upon entering the pre-discharge mode, the electronic sounder shall provide a pulsed output. Upon
system discharge, the electronic sounder shall provide a steady output and a strobe light shall
flash. The strobe lens shall be of white translucent construction with the word "FM-200" imprinted
upon it. All field wiring connections shall be made to wire leads on the device.

J. Electrical Control Equipment

1. The control panel to be used for the automatic fire detection and FM-200 fire suppression
system shall be U.L. Listed and F.M. Approved and include the following:

a. Cross-zone detection. (Ionization and photoelectric detectors shall be installed

on separate zones of the cross-zoned system). Manual release stations shall not
be connected to the detector circuits.

b. Class "A" parallel wiring of the detection circuits. (Two required, for cross
zoning).

c. Series supervised FM-200 release circuits.

d. Battery standby power of sufficient capacity for 24 hours of stand-by operation

plus 5 minutes of alarm operation.

e. Three (3) supervised audible/visual output circuits.

f. Five amp (SA) rated auxiliary contacts, as required, to perform auxiliary

functions. Relays shall be an integral part of the system, U.L. Listed as part of
the control system.

g. Digital display showing number of seconds remaining until discharge. Display

shall consist of two (2) seven segment L.E.D. numerals, minimum 1 inch high.

h. Container "Disable" switch, with corresponding release circuit trouble indication.

i. Voltmeter to indicate system voltage and amp meter to indicate battery

charge/discharge current.

j. Class "B" wired detection only circuits. (Two required, not related to activation of
FM-200 system).

2. The control panel shall operate on the cross zone concept. Any single activated detector
shall be processed by the control panel as first zone alarm condition. The activation of
another detector in a separate detector shall be processed by the control panel as first
zone alarm condition. The activation of another detector in a separate detection zone
shall cause the affected area to enter the pre-discharge mode. If no time delay is

SECTION 15365 – FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 4 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

programmed, then the system shall immediately discharge upon activation of the second
detector. The discharge circuit shall be energized in the affected area and the red
"Release" L.E.D. on the panel will illuminate. Detection circuits shall be installed with
photoelectric smoke detectors in one zone and ionization detectors in the other zone, such
that discharge will occur only after one detector of each type has sensed an alarm
condition. Detection circuits in raised floor spaces shall have photoelectric detectors only,
due to anticipated conditions of dust and/or high air velocities.

3. The control panel shall utilize series supervised solenoid devices as the method of
discharging the extinguishing agent. The solenoids shall be energized directly from the
control panel when system discharge is required. Systems which employ devices external
to the control panel to either supervise releasing devices or to provide energy for
discharge will not be accepted.

4. The control panel shall be equipped with a supervised service disconnect switch.
Operation of this switch shall generate a trouble signal, activate an L.E.D., and electrically
isolate all releasing devices from receiving a discharge signal. With the switch in the
"disconnected" position, it shall be possible to simulate any alarm condition and observe
proper operation of all detection and signaling circuits without causing agent discharge.

5. The control panel shall be equipped with auxiliary relays for shutdown operations. The
control panel shall be capable of programming relays independently to operate on either
trouble, system aborted, alarm, pre-discharge or discharge modes.

6. The control panel shall have a separate supervisory circuit for monitoring pressure
switches on all containers. A distinct "cylinder pressure" indicator and audible signal shall
be provided in the event of a low pressure condition. An open circuit condition shall cause
a separate "fault" indication instead of a "cylinder pressure" indication.

7. The control panel, in addition to its yellow system trouble, L.E.D. shall further break down
a trouble condition with the use of diagnostic L.E.D.'s. These L.E.D.'s shall indicate the
following trouble conditions:

a. Low pressure conditions on containers (visible with panel door closed)

b. Open condition, pressure supervisory circuit (separate diagnostic L.E.D.)

c. Audible signaling circuits - reverse polarity, open or short circuit (separate L.E.D.
for each audible circuit)

d. Detection circuit - open circuit (separate L.E.D. for each detection circuit)

e. Releasing circuit-open circuit

f. Manual release circuit - open circuit

g. Abort circuit - open circuit (NOTE: Open abort circuit shall not prevent automatic
system discharge).

h. A.C. power loss

i. Battery Fault - open or shorted cell, disconnect

j. Ground fault

k. System alarm audible circuit - reverse polarity, short or open

l. Microprocessor failure - flashing indicator

8. Common Control Board

The control panel shall have a common control board which provides common alarm and
trouble indications as well as alarm silence and reset switches. A common Class "B"
wired general alarm circuit shall be provided for common area signaling as well as
separate from "C" dry contacts for general alarm and trouble. A switch shall be provided
that will silence all active signals. Silencing of audible alarms shall be controlled by
"resound" logic, whereby any subsequent new alarm conditions or system discharge will
reactivate audible circuits. A "lamp test" switch shall be provided which will illuminate all
alarm and diagnostic L.E.D.'s and the digital countdown display.

SECTION 15365 – FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 5 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9. Power Supply Board

The control panel shall have a solid state, high speed switching power supply with 24 VDC
output capable of responding instantly to voltage and current surges on the input and
output sides to protect the system from malfunction and damage. A supervised battery
charging circuit and ground fault sensing circuitry shall be an integral part of the power
supply. Battery standby power shall be "on-line" such that batteries will supply power to
the system in the event of AC power loss without a power transfer relay.

10. Suppression Control Board

One board shall be provided for each protected area. The unit shall provide (Class "A")
(Class "B") wired detection and series supervised release circuits. Class "B" wired signal
circuits shall be provided for different distinct audible and visual indications for alarm, pre-
discharge, and discharge conditions. Supervised manual release and abort circuits shall
be provided (complete with digital display to indicate visually per zone the seconds
remaining until discharge). The timer shall be field settable from 0-60 seconds, in 10
second increments, by means of switches to the exact time required in seconds.

11. Standby Power

The control panel shall house its own sealed gel-type standby battery power. Batteries
shall be sized to provide a minimum 24 hours standby power, but in no case shall be less
than 10 AH capacity. Batteries shall be supervised and provide a trouble signal upon
disconnect, open or shorted cell.

K. Extinguishing Sub-Systems

The system shall be designed to provide a minimum 7 percent volume concentration of

extinguishing agent. The system shall be capable of meeting the performance parameters in the
National Fire Protection Association Standard 2001. The extinguishing system shall include the
following components:

a. Agent storage container with valve

b. Discharge nozzle (s)

c. Solenoid operated releasing device

d. Cylinder mounting racks and brackets

e. FM-200 agent

1. The FM-200 agent shall be stored in a storage container. This container shall be
capable of being filled in one pound increments of FM-200. The FM-200
discharge shall be activated by an output directly from the control panel, which
will activate the solenoid in the releasing device. FM-200 agent is stored in the
container as a liquid, having a natural vapor pressure of 66.4 psia at 77°F. To
aid release and distribution, the container shall be superpressurized to 360 psig
at 70°F with dry nitrogen.

2. The releasing device shall be easily removable from the cylinder without
emptying the cylinder. While removed from cylinder, the releasing device shall
be capable of being operated, with no replacement of parts required after this
operation. The use of explosive devices to actuate agent discharge shall not be
permitted. Upon discharge of the system, no parts shall require replacement
other than gaskets, lubricants and the FM-200 agent. Systems which require
replacement of disks, squibs, or any other parts which add to the recharge cost
will not be acceptable.

3. Systems containing components which have a dated life span and must be
periodically replaced shall not be acceptable.

4. The releasing device shall also be capable of direct mechanical actuation,

providing a means of discharge in the event of total electrical malfunction. The
device shall be provided with a manual lever and a face plate with clear
instructions on how to mechanically activate the system.

SECTION 15365 – FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 6 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

5. All agent storage containers shall be activated either an electrical manual

discharge station, an automatic device (or devices) or by direct mechanical
actuation.

6. FM-200 storage cylinders shall be provided with safety rupture disc. An increase
in internal pressure due to high temperature shall rupture the safety disc and
allow the contents to vent before the rupture pressure of the container is
reached. The contents shall not be vented through the discharge piping and
nozzles. FM-200 containers shall be equipped with a pressure gauge to display
internal pressures. The gauge shall be an integral part of the container and shall
be color-coded for fast referencing of pressure readings.

7. A low pressure switch shall be provided as standard equipment on all containers.

A decrease in pressure will cause the normally open contacts to close, indicating
a trouble condition at the control panel.

8. (A liquid level device shall be standard equipment on (all) (the) container(s). This
device will provide a reliable means other than weighing for determining the
agent weight with the storage container during normal routine servicing. Use of
the liquid level indicator shall not require any additional space when the container
is installed.).

9. Discharge nozzles shall be used to disperse the FM-200. The nozzles shall be
brass with female threads and available in 1" through 2" sizes. Each size shall
come in two styles: 180° and 360° dispersion patterns. The nozzle used shall be
provided with pipe threads that correspond to the nozzle size. The nozzle used
shall be F.M.. Approved and U.L. Listed.

10. Each FM-200 system shall utilize a solenoid operated releasing device which
causes discharge of all storage containers in the system. Each releasing device
shall be separately series supervised and operated directly from the control
panel.

11.. The extinguishing agent shall be FM-200.

(1, 1, 1, 2, 3, 3, 3 - heptaflouropropane).

2.3 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION:

The system shall be designed and installed such that it is actuated by two detectors in alarm.

A. Actuation of any one detector.

1. Provide a steady alarm electronic sounder signal associated with the area in which the
detector was actuated.
Alternate: (Use with No. 1 Alternate in B)

2. Provide a steady alarm signal with a 6" vibrating alarm bell.

3. Annunciate to graphical display panel to indicate location of detector in alarm.

4. Annunciate to Employer's monitoring equipment.

5. Perform necessary control functions such as HVAC equipment starting.

6. Shut down and/or keep all emergency generators from starting.

B. Actuation of a Second Detector.

1. Provide a pulsed electronic sounder signal. Alternate: (Use with No. 1 Alternate A.1)

2. The steady alarm bell shall silence and an electronic sounder shall provide a steady
signal.

3. Annunciate to graphical display panel to indicate location of detector in alarm.

4. Actuate a time delay mechanism with illuminated display. Time delay shall delay release
of the FM-200. The FM-200 shall be released at the end of this time internal unless an
abort switch is operated at any time during the interval which shall freeze the time delay
mechanism at its current position and keep it in this mode until the abort switch is
released. Upon release of the abort switch, the time delay cycle will resume unless the

SECTION 15365 – FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 7 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

entire system has been restored to normal by switching the reset switch on the FM-200
control panel.

5. Actuation of any abort station will cause the audible signal to change, acknowledging
proper abort operation.

SECTION 15365 – FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 8 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

C. Discharge of Agent

1. Energize flashing light labeled "FM-200".

2. Annunciate to Client's monitoring equipment.

3. Provide a pulsed output from the electronic sounder.

The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge stations for each protected area.
Operation of a manual discharge station shall cause alarm and shutdown devices to operate the same as if
the system had operated automatically and shall start the time delay sequence. The FM-200 shall be
released at the end of this time delay. Operation of a manual discharge station shall override all abort
devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

All work shall be completed in a high degree of workmanship and in compliance with current NFPA Standard
2001, 72E, 75 and local codes. All openings shall be sealed at time of system installation to prevent
leakage and maintain system integrity.

3.2 SYSTEM CHECKOUT, CLIENT’S TRAINING AND ACCEPTANCE:

Upon completion of installation, a meeting shall be held at the site with the Contractor. Equipment supplier
and Client's personnel shall be present. The Contractor shall familiarize Client’s personnel with system
components, system functions, and recommended procedures. At this time, a functional test of the system
will be demonstrated. (A room integrity test shall be conducted in accordance with NFPA 2001.) The
Contractor shall provide the necessary personnel and instruments to conduct this test. The Contractor shall
provide the Client with a complete operational and maintenance manual as well as a written summary of a
functional test conducted. The Contractor shall be capable of conducting semiannual system inspection and
be equipped to recondition the complete system within 24 hours in the event of a system actuation. The
following shall be included in the Contractor's quotation:

1. Duration of training.

2. Location of training (on site if feasible).

3. Material covered and training aids available.

3.3 MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEM:

A maintenance agreement shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration; however, this agreement
may or may not be accepted.

3.4 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE:

1. The final test and acceptance shall be conducted in the presence of the Contractor, Engineer and
governing authorities.

2. Tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as intended. All circuits shall be
tested: Automatic discharge, manual discharge, equipment shutdown, alarm devices, and storage
container pressure. In addition, supervision of each circuit shall be tested. Each detection device
shall be tested according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures of NFPA 72E.

3. Room integrity tests shall be conducted. Tests shall be conducted by the FM-200 equipment
manufacturer or FM-200 equipment manufacturer's representative in the presence of the
Contractor and the Engineer. Such tests shall be made only after the control system has tested
satisfactorily. If test results indicate that the holding time can not be maintained, the Contractor
shall determine and correct the cause of failure. The Contractor shall then conduct a second room
integrity test at no additional cost to the Client.

4. As a condition of final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide operational training to the Client's
personnel. The training sessions shall include emergency procedures, abort functions, system
control panel operation, trouble procedures and safety requirements.

5. Upon acceptance by the Client, the complete system shall be conditioned, containers refilled and/or
replaced, and the system placed in operation.

SECTION 15365 – FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 9 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3.5 WARRANTY:

System shall be warranted for parts and labor for not less than a period of one (1) year from date of
completion of the Works. The Contractors shall maintain and service the system during the warranty period
to maintain warranty conditions.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 15365 – FM200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 10 / 10

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15375

STANDPIPE AND FIRE HOSE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Supply, install & test stand pipe and fire hose system as shown on the drawings to NFPA 14 and
as specified below.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide.

B. NFPA 14 - Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.

C. NFPA 14 - Automatic Foam System

D. UL - Fire Protection Equipment Directory.

E. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or
equivalent authorities.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS.

A. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Requirements.

B. Section 15075 Mechanical Identification.

C. Section 15325 Sprinkler System.

1.4 SUBMITTALS.

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate supports, components, accessories and sizes.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalogue sheet for equipment indicating rough-in size,
finish, and accessories.

C. Submit Shop Drawings and product data to the authority having jurisdiction to Owner’s insurance
underwriter for approval. Submit proof of approval to the Consultants.

D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate rough-in, assembly, and general arrangement.

1.5 WARRANTY.

A. Provide one year manufacture warranty effective from substantial completion of all equipment
and products supplied.

SECTION 15375 – STANDPIPE AND FIRE HOSE SYSTEM 1/3

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.6 GUARANTEE.

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the full installation for one year from substantial completion.

B. The guarantee shall cover materials and labour for the complete system as covered in Section
15010.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS.

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only.
Contractor may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for
the approval of the Client’s Representative.

2.2 HOSE CABINET:

A. Style: Recessed Semi-recessed or Surface mounted as shown as drawings

B. Tub: 16 gage (1.6 mm) thick steel, prepared for pipe and accessory rough-in.
C. Door: 12 gage (2.7 mm) thick steel, flush glazed, with 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick wired glass full panel,
hinged, positive latch device as shown on ID drawings.
D. Finish: Prime Coated Enameled, or Laminate, type and color as per ID drawings.

2.3 HOSE RACK: Steel with polished chrome finishes; swivel type with pins and water stop.

2.4 HOSE REEL: Galvanized steel with epoxy polyster powder coating; 180º swinging hose reel drum.

2.5 HOSE: 100 feet (30 mm) of rubber lined synthetic hose; mildew and rot-resistant.

2.6 NOZZLE: Brass, chrome plated; combination fog, straight stream, and adjustable shut-off.

2.7 ANGLE VALVE: Hydrolator type, 1” inch (25 mm) nominal size, or otherwise as shown on drawings,

2.8 FIRE DEPARTMENT OUTLET VALVE: Angle type; brass chrome plated finish; 2-1/2 inch (65 mm)
size, thread to match fire department hardware, 300 psig (2 MPa) working pressure, with threaded cap
and chain of same material and finish; .

2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION:

A. Type: Flush mounted wall or Free standing type with ductile iron pedestal as shown on
drawings.

B. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain
of matching material and finish.

C. Drain: 3/4 inch (19 mm) automatic drip, connected to drain.

D. Label: “Standpipe - Fire Department Connection”.

E. Finish to ID approval.

2.10 FOAM GENERATOR

1. Foam Generator mobile or fixed rechargeable self contained foam production unit complete with
foam inductor and spreader and hose for water connection capacity 2130 liters/min of foam at 7
bars for 18 minutes operation with 3% inductor setting similar to Angus AH AF-120 mobile foam
unit

SECTION 15375 – STANDPIPE AND FIRE HOSE SYSTEM 2/3

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.11 FIRE EXTINGUISHER

1. Carbon Dioxide: Hose and horn discharge, self-closing lever or squeeze grip operated, insulated
handle, 6 kg capacity with 5 BC rating.

2. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical: Minimum of 70% Mono Ammonium Phosphate Concentration.

Pressurized with hose and shut-off nozzle or integral shut-off nozzle, 6 kg capacity, with 2A, or 10
BC rating.

2.12 FIRE HYDRANT

Shall be of cast iron construction, complying with AWWA C502, 6-inch dry barrel, traffic type. Hydrants
shall have two 2-1/2 inch hose nozzles and one having 4-1/2 inch bumper nozzle. Nozzles shall be
American National Standard Fire Hose Coupling Screw Thread in accordance with NFPA 1963, and
conforming to the requirements of local Fire Department. Hydrants shall include break off valve stem
coupling in break flanges. Each inlet shall have a plug and chain. Units shall be finished in red enamel,
with words both in English and Arabic “FIRE HYDRANT” in raised letters.

PART-3 EXECUTION:

3.1 INSTALLATION.

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install in accordance with NFPA 14 for standpipe and hose systems

C. Locate and secure hose cabinet plumb and level. Establish top of cabinet (inside horizontal)
surface 78 inches (2000 mm) above finished floor as shown on ID drawings.

D. Locate angle valve in cabinet at 60 inches (1500 mm) above floor. Locate fire department
connection below angle valve and not closer than 4 inches (100 mm) from side or bottom of
cabinet.

E. Locate dry chemical fire extinguisher in cabinet.

F. Connect standpipe system to water source ahead of domestic water connection.

G. Where static pressure exceeds (100 psi 690 kPa) at any hose station, provide pressure reducing
valve to prevent pressure on hose exceeding 90 psi (620 kPa).

H. Provide two way fire department outlet connection on roof.

I. Flush entire system of foreign matter.

3.2 SYSTEM TEST

A. Hydrostatically test entire system in accordance with NFPA 14.

B. Test shall be witnessed by authority having jurisdiction and any party assigned by Consultants.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 15375 – STANDPIPE AND FIRE HOSE SYSTEM 3/3

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15410

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of all plumbing fixtures and trim including all
the carriers, supports, anchors, and accessories as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
Plumbing fixtures to be used shall be of an approved models as selected from KOHLER, JACOB
DELAFON or approved equal. A fully comprehensive selection shall be proposed by the
Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering. Such selections shall
include and details all accessories, mixers, valves, soap dishes, hooks, bars, paperholders, etc.
including colours and finish. A preliminary selection of sanitary fixture models and accessories is
available at the Offices of the Engineer and a copy of such selection is available upon request.

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

A112.1.2 Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems.

A112.6.1M Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.

A112.18.1M Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.

A112.19.2 Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.

Z124.1 Plastic Bathtub Units.

Z124.2 Plastic Shower Receptors and Shower Stalls.

B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

F409 Thermoplastic Accessible and Replaceable Plastic Tube and Tubular Fittings.

F444 Scald Prevention Devices and Systems in Bathing Areas.

F445 Thermal-Shock Preventing Devices and Systems in Showering Areas.

F446 Grab Bars and Accessories Installed in the Bathing Areas.

F462 Slip-Resistant Bathing Facilities.

C. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

A112.6.1M Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.

A112.18.1M Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
A112.19.2M Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
A112.19.5 Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals

D. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering

1023 Hot Water Dispensers, Household Storage, Electrical

E. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

399 Drinking Water Coolers.

1261 Electric Water Heaters for Pools and Tubs.

F. BOCA - Building Officials and Code Administrator International, Inc.

National Plumbing Code.

G. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials

SECTION 15410 – PLUMBING FIXTURES 1/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Uniform Plumbing Code.

The factory assembled major equipment shall be UL listed or Certified from CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit product data and installation instructions for each fixture, faucet, specialty,
accessories and trims specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit rough-in drawings. Detail dimension, rough-in requirements, required
clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages.

C. Color Charts.

1.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

A. All materials and components specified under this section shall be provided in manufacturer's
original new and unopened protective packing bearing manufacturer's name and label.

B. Store materials not in actual use in covered and well-ventilated area and protect them from dirt,
dust, moisture, direct sunlight and extreme temperatures.

C. For further requirements follow manufacturer's written instruction regarding storage and handling.

1.5 WARRANTY:

A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for the period of 5 years from
the dated of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of
defective materials and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of and components, whose

products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 5 years period, and shall
be subject to approval of the Engineer.

B. Installer Qualifications: Experienced workmen authorized by the manufacturer, and subject to

approval of the Engineer.

C. All the components and installations shall comply with the requirements of specified codes and
standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Document is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS:

A. Fixture shall have concealed arms, steel pipe uprights for support from floor and block bases,
secured to floor, and/or walls, and shall be of types herein.

B. Plumbing fixture supports shall conform to ANSI A112.6.1.

2.3 VITREOUS CHINA FIXTURES:

A. All fixtures specified as vitreous China shall be of the best quality, non-absorbent and burned so
that the whole mass is thoroughly fused and vitrified, producing a material which when fractured will
show a homogenous mass, close grained and free from pores.

B. Colors shall be as approved by the Engineer, thoroughly fused, united to body without
discoloration, chips or flaws and shall be free from craze.

C. Warped or otherwise imperfect fixtures shall not be acceptable.

D. Vitreous China fixtures shall comply with ANSI A112.19.2.

SECTION 15410 – PLUMBING FIXTURES 2/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.4 FIXTURE TRIMS:

A. Exposed fixture trims which include faucets, strainers, escutcheons, water closet supplies, stops,
waste, trap and all trimmings below lavatories, etc. shall be made of brass and shall be polished
chrome-plated. All exposed IPS piping and tubing shall be red brass, chrome-plated.

B. Brass for chrome-plating shall conform to ANSI A112.18.1 and shall be thoroughly cleaned and
polished before plating.

C. Plating shall be thoroughly and evenly applied and also guaranteed not to strip or peel.

D. Trims shall comply with ANSI A112.19.5

2.5 FIXTURES:

GENERAL : All Sanitary Fixtures shall be subjected to the selections approved by the Engineer / ID

A. Western Water Closets: Vitreous China, floor-mounted, washdown, self-siphonage closet, with
bowl interior surface flushing rim passage and orifices, complete with flush valve or flush tank as
shown on drawings and anti-siphon float valve. Provide mounting bolt covers, inside calk or
threaded bronze floor flange with impregnated felt gasket, seat and supplies and stops. Seats shall
be solid molded plastic.

B. Eastern Water Closets: Vitreous China water conserving flush type, bonded integral squatting floor
plate with non-skid foot treads, anti-splash flushing rim, integral 20 mm supply connection, and
flush valve unit.

C. Bidets: Vitreous China compatible in design and color with the water closets, and shall be walls or
floor-mounted complete with supply fittings, flushing rims, sprays and bolt caps.

D. Lavatories: Vitreous China counter-set or wall-mounted as required, front overflow, with pop-up
waste, concealed arm carriers, faucets, trap supply connection and stops.

E. Shower Trays: Shower trays shall be approximately 800 mm square by 150 mm high, and shall be
of a single piece with non-slip floor finish, furnished complete with drain fittings and shower and
bath fittings as required.

F. Service Sinks: Acid-resisting enameled inside, cast iron service sink with back wall hanger and
with stainless steel rim guard. Provide complete with service sink cast iron trap standard to wall,
having acid-resisting enamel finish inside, painted outside, with cleanout plug and strainer, and
outlet for iron pipe. Provide faucet.

G. Kitchen Sinks:

1. Kitchen sinks shall be 1.3 mm thick stainless steel type with double or single bowl as
required, 34 liter each, counter-top type, self-rimming, flush fitting deck and made for use
with food waste disposers. Sinks shall have 4 holes for use with spray type hose faucet.

2. Faucets: Faucets for kitchen sinks shall be single lever type with minimum 250 mm long
swing spout aerator tip, hose and spray attachment and shall have chrome and stainless
steel finish, with a 20 mm center-set spread. Maximum flow 9 liters/minute.

H. Grease Interceptor: Shall be manufacturer's standard fabricated of steel with black duco coating
inside and outside, and shall be complete with flow control fittings and other required accessories to
intercept grease and oil-laden waste discharged from the fixtures. Capacities shall be as indicated
on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Integral extensions shall permit a greater
dimension from centerline of inlets and outlets to finished floor level to accommodate deeper
roughing-in conditions.

I. Perennial Spray: Perennial spray handles shall be non-conductive, self-closing valves, with hanger
rings, aerator nozzles, and volume saving water control. Hoses shall be one meter long, flexible
stainless steel with chrome-plated wall hooks similar to Chicago faucet ablution hose or approved
equal.

J. Faucets: Faucets shall be polished chrome-plated / or as per ID request, spouts with constant flow
aerator, handles, pop-up waste, as selected by the Engineer from approved manufacturer's product
line.

SECTION 15410 – PLUMBING FIXTURES 3/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

K. Fixture Supports: All wall-hung plumbing fixtures shall be furnished with the fixture manufacturer's
standard chair carriers or wall hangers. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary bolts, fittings and
accessories required for a complete installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine rough-in for potable cold/hot water supplies and also soil, waste and vent piping systems to
verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. Examine walls, floors and
cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Install plumbing fixtures and trim level and plumb in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written
instructions, the original design, and the referenced codes and standards.

B. Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI A117.1.

C. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind or within
wall construction to provide rigid installations.

D. Set shower trays in a leveling bed of cement grout.

E. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture.

F. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems. If any equipment or fixture
has connection different from installed piping, the necessary adapter fittings shall be provided and
installed to match the fixture/equipment connection.

G. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork.

H. Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant as specified in Section 07900 - SEALANTS.
Match sealant color to fixture color.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.

B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper installation and operation upon completion of installation and
after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units then retest.

3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. Operate and adjust faucets, water heaters and control. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units
and controls.

B. Clean fixtures, fittings, spouts, drain strainers and trim using manufacturer's recommended cleaning
methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. Do allow use of fixtures for temporary
facilities, except when approved in writing by the Engineer. Any fixtures with damaged finishes shall
be replaced by the Contractor at his own cost.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 15410 – PLUMBING FIXTURES 4/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15430

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL:

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work under this section consists of furnishings, installations and commissioning the Plumbing
Specialities as shown on the drawings and specified below.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 15050 Basic Piping Materials and Methods.

2. Section 15410 Plumbing Fixtures.
3. Section 15450 Plumbing Equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.

B. ANSI/ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent.
C. ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.
D. ANSI/ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types.
E. ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
F. ANSI A112.21.2 - Roof Drains.
G. ANSI A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors.
H. ASTM C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections.
I. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check
Valve Types.
J. PDI WH-201 - Water Hammers Arresters.
K. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or
equivalent authorities.
L. Approved equal BS/EN Standards

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.

B. Product Data: Provide components sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes and finishes.

C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that grease and/or oil interceptors meet or exceed specified
requirements.

1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.

B. Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow preventers.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

A. Submit under provision of Division 1.

SECTION 154300 – PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 1/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

B. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment for interceptors.

C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instruction, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.

B. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

1.7 WARRANTY.

A. Provide one year manufacture warranty effective from substantial completion of all equipment
and products supplied.

1.8 GUARANTEE.

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the full installation for one year from substantial completion.

B. The guarantee shall cover materials and labour for the complete system.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS.

A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Provide two of loose keys, hose end vacuum breakers, service kits for the equipment covered.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international and local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 DRAINS:

A Floor Drain (FD-1): Constructed of uPVC body with Integral deep trap seal (50mm) with pipe connection
inlet of 50mm and 75mm pipe outlet. The cover plate and strainer shall be of stainless steel as
approved by the Interior Designer and Engineer.

B Floor Drain (FD-2): Shower drain constructed of epoxy-coated cast iron body with integral trap seal
side outlet and adjustable stainless steel cover as approved by the Interior Designer and Engineer.
ZURN model Z-450 .

C Floor Drain ( FD3 - Indirect Type) : ZURN MODEL : Z-415 body assembly with “Type-E” strainer
floor drain epoxy coated, cast iron body with bottom outlet, P-trap and 1/2” primer connection.
Combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable collar with polished, nickel bronze strainer
with 4” diameter funnel.

D FD-4 : Floor Drain (Kitchens and Laundry) : ZURN MODEL : Z-356 multi-inlet adjustable floor drain
with trap. Epoxy coated cast iron body with integral trap seal, complete with cleanout plug, invertia
collar, polished nickel bronze adjustable top.

E FD-5 : Planter Drain : ZURN MODEL : Z-352 – 6” diameter small area planting drain, epoxy coated
cast iron body with bottom outlet, plain bronze membrane flashing clamp and dome strainer with
stainless steel mesh screen over dome.

SECTION 154300 – PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 2/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

F Gutter Drain: Cast iron type with 5/8” priming line connected.

G GD-1: (Gutter Drain) ZURN Model 415 Body Assembly with “Type G” Strainer, epoxy coated cast
iron body with bottom outlet, combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable collar with
“Type G” polished, nickel bronze strainer with dome grate.

H GD-2: (Gutter Grating) Gutter Drain similar to GD-1 with medium duty grating; “Kitchen and
Laundry ZURN Model Z-792. 12” x 20”. Epoxy coated cast iron medium duty grating in fabricated
steel frame with anchor strips.

I GD-3: (Gutter Grating) Gutter drain similar to GD-1 with heavy duty grating; ZURN Model Z-793.
12” x 24”. Epoxy coated cast iron heavy duty grating in fabricated steel frame with anchor strips.

J Area Drain (AD-1): Constructed of epoxy-coated cast iron body with bottom outlet with P-trap and
priming line, with flashing clamp and frame and medium duty cast iron 7” diameter slotted grating.
ZURN Model Z-507.

K Area Drain (AD-2) : Area Drain (Heavy Duty) : ZURN MODEL : Z-610 – 12” heavy duty drain 12”
square type drain. Epoxy coated cast iron body with bottom outlet with P-trap and priming line.
Seepage pan and combination membrane flashing clamp and frame for heavy duty cast iron loose
slotted grate with suspended sediment bucket.

L Roof Drain (RD-1) : Elevated cast iron dome with epoxy-coated cast iron body with membrane
flashing clamp, gravel guard and perforated stainless steel extension. ZURN Model Z-107

M Parapet Angle Drain (RD-2): ZURN MODEL : Z-187 Parapet angle epoxy coated cast iron body
with reversible back or bottom outlet. Oblique grate with 90 degrees or 45 degrees combination
frame and membrane flashing clamp.

N Balcony Drain (RD-3): ZURN MODEL : Z-158 Balcony drain epoxy coated cast iron body with 90
degrees or 45 degrees outlet and flush type strainer with combination frame and membrane
flashing clamp.

O Balcony Angle Type Drain (RD-4): ZURN MODEL : Z-189 Scupper drain epoxy coated cast iron
body with 90 degrees or 45 degrees outlet and flush type strainer with combination frame and
membrane flashing clamp.

P RD-5 : Roof Scupper With Down Spout : ZURN MODEL : Z-198 Scupper drain epoxy coated cast
iron body with 90 degrees or 45 degrees outlet and flush type strainer with combination frame and
membrane flashing clamp. Use parapet scupper sleeve with bronze downspout nozzle.

2.4 CLEANOUTS COVER.

A. Interior Finished Area: Plugged pipe covered with stainless steel or chrome plated bronze frame
and cover as approved by the ID and Engineer.

B. Wall Type: Plugged pipe covered with stainless steel access cover unless shown otherwise on
ID drawings.

C. Exterior Finished Floor : Round or square, cast nickel bronze access frame and non-
skid cover unless shown otherwise on ID drawings.

SECTION 154300 – PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 3/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.5 HOSE BIBB:

Chrome plated brass or bronze with integral mounting flange, serrated end handle and vacuum breaker.

2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS.

A. Recessed Pressure Backflow Preventers: ASNI/ASSE 1013 or AWWA C506 bronze body with
bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring
loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check
valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-
threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves; strainer; and four test cocks.

B. Double Check Valve Assemblies: ANSI/ASSE 1012 or AWWA C506; Bronze body with
corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check
valves with intermediate atmospheric vent.

2.7 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS.

A. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in
temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psig (1700
kPa) working pressure.

2.8 GREASE INTERCEPTOR:

Construction: Epoxy coated concrete construction, for on floor, semi, recessed flush mounting or
externally installed. Multi-weir baffle assembly, integral deep seal trap and non-skid epoxy coated steel
cover and double seal Gasket, securing handle and enzyme injection port and bronze clean-out plug.

Grease interceptor construction shall comply with Local Municipality Requirements.

2.10 PERCOLATION PIT:

A. Cast in Place Concrete – Construct in conformance with the requirements of Section 03300 –
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE.

B. Chambers: Includes distribution piping, end plates, and other standard components as required
for system total capacity and as shown on the drawings.

C. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 19mm to 63mm washed crushed stone or gravel

D. Filter Mat: Geotextile woven or spun filter fabric, in one or more layers, for minimum total unit
weight of 135 g/sq.m.

2.11 OIL DIESEL INTERCEPTOR.

Constructed of steel, cast iron or concrete with multi weir, step iron, covers and frames as per detail,
piping shall be cast iron. Recommended Manufacturer: Zurn, Model Z-1186 or approved equal.

2.12 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES.

A. Type and capacity shall be as specified on the drawings.

B. Accessories.

SECTION 154300 – PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 4/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Check valve on inlets.

2. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet.
3. Stem thermometer on outlets.
4. Strainer stop checks on inlets.

C. Cabinet: 16 gage (1.5 mm) prime coated steel, for recessed or surface mounting with keyed
lock.

2.13 MANHOLES.

Shall be constructed from reinforced precast or cast in site concrete with benched bottom. The
manhole cover and frame shall be double sealed standard weight, and heavy duty in vehicular traffic
areas. Steps shall be of cast iron, or galvanized steel or specialist non ferrous material. The manhole
shall be internally coated with epoxy, and externally with water proofing membrane. Unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings, manholes and frame sizes shall be as follows:

Manhole Manhole Depth Manhole Size Manhole Cover Remarks

Type (mm) (mm) opening size (mm)

MH1 Up to 1.0 m 600 mm dia. 600 mm dia

MH2 1.0m to 1.50 m 900 mm dia. 600 mm dia.
MH3 More than 1.50m 1200 mm dia. 900 mm dia.

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

3.1 PREPARATION.

A. Coordinate cutting and forming of roof and floor construction to receive drains to required invert
elevations.

3.2 INSTALLATION.

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture
of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

D. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.

E. Install water hammer arrestors for each group of plumbing fixtures, end of line and quick closing
valves, complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping.

F Provide manual air vent at all high points.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 154300 – PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 5/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15450

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL:

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The work under this section consists of furnishing and installing all plumbing equipment
specialties and related items as indicated on the drawings as specified below.

B RELATED SECTIONS.

1. Section 15050 Basic Piping Materials and Methods.

2. Section 15060 Supports and Anchors.
3. Section 15070 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic
Control
1.2 REFERENCES.

A. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design.

B. ASME Section VIIID - Pressure Vessels; Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.
D. ANSI/UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters.
E. ANSI/UL 174 - Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters.
F. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
G. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or
equivalent authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include heat exchanger dimensions, size of tappings and performance data.

2. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points,
tappings and drains.

C. Product Data:

1. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to

other equipment and piping.
2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements, and affected adjacent construction.
3. Submit certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and
system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.

SECTION 15450 – PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 1/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

B. Include operation, maintenance and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability
and service depot location and telephone number.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE.

A. Perform Work in accordance with the standards and the code of practice.

B. Provide pumps with manufacturer’s name, model number, and rating/capacity identified and
certified by manufacturer.

C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with

recommendations and requirements of the following organizations:

1. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
3. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI.
4. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).
5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

D. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of
midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

E. Manufacturer to guarantee the availability of spare parts for all components at least five years
after substantial completion.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS.

A. Conform standards under Item 1.3 for the requirements for water heaters.

B. Conform to ASME Section VIIID for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat exchangers.

C. Conform to ASME Section VIIID for tanks.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.

A. Deliver in manufacturer’s original new protective packing.

B. Handle carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring, do not install damage
components replace by new.

C. Store in clean dry place, protect two weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and
physical damage.

D. Comply with manufacturer rigging and installation instructions for unloading and moving to final
location.

1.8 WARRANTY.

A. Provide one year manufacture warranty effective from substantial completion of all equipment
and products supplied.

1.9 GUARANTEE.

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the full installation for one year from substantial completion.

B. The guarantee shall cover materials and labour for the complete system.

SECTION 15450 – PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 2/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1 GENERAL: Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only.
Contractor may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for
the approval of the Engineer.

2.2 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER.

A. Type: Automatic, electric, vertical or horizontal storage type, UL- approved.

B. Performance: 100 degrees F (38 degrees C) temperature rise, and 150 psig (1000 kPa)
maximum working pressure.

C. Tank: Glass lined, welded steel, thermally insulated and encased in corrosion-resistant steel
jacket; baked-on enamel white finish.

D. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with temperature range from 120 to 170 degrees F (49 to
77 degrees C), flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, enclosed controls and electrical
junction box and operating light.

E. Heating element: Sheathed in mineral filling and in copper tube, screwed ends.

F. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, high-density magnesium
anode, and ASME temperature and pressure relief valve.

2.3 PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEMS.

A. System: Packaged with multiple pumps, factory assembled, tested, and adjusted; shipped to
site as integral unit; consisting of pumps, valves, and galvanized piping, with control panel
assembled on fabricated steel base with structural steel framework.

B. Pump: Cast iron casing, bronze impeller and trim, stainless steel shaft.

C. Controls and Instruments: Locate in NEMA 250 Type 1 general purpose enclosure with main
disconnect interlocked with door, fused circuit for each motor, magnetic starters with three
overloads, control circuit transformer with fuse protection, selector switch for each pump, low
limit pressure switch, low pressure alarm light, running lights, current sensing devices,
minimum run timers, manual and automatic alternation to equalize pumps running time every
250 hours suction and discharge pressure gages.

D. Lead Pump: Operate continuously with lag pumps operating on system demand. Should
lead pump fail to operate, next pump in sequence shall start automatically.

E. Time Delay Relay: Prevent lag pumps short cycling on fluctuating demands.

F. Thermal Bleed Circuit with Solenoid Valve: Prevent overheating during low demand.

G. Low Pressure Control: Stop pump operation if incoming water pressure drops to atmospheric.

H. Pump Switch: Permit manual or automatic operation.

I. Valving: System discharge combination pressure reducing and check valve to maintain
constant system pressure. Provide gate or butterfly valves on suction and discharge of each
pump. Provide check valve on each pump discharge.

SECTION 15450 – PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 3/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

J. Time Clock for Automatic pump Changeover: Will alternate pumps operation to achieve equal
ware every 250 hours of run time.

K. All Alarms shall be combined to give one remote system alarm: The available alarm to be
manually silenced, the visual to switch off once the course is redressed.

L. The following signals shall be monitored on the BMS (where available) unless indicated
otherwise.

1. Pumps Status ON/OFF.

2. Pump Set General Alarm
3. Water Tank Low/High/High high alarms

M. The pumps status On-Off will be monitored by the BMS (Where specified).

2.4 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS :

A. Type: Completely submersible vertical centrifugal. Pump(s) installed in concrete pump

chamber as shown on drawings.

B. Casing: Corrosion resistant epoxy coated pump body and oil filled motor chamber.

C. Impeller: Cast iron; open non-clog for drainage, open with grinder for grinding solids and
textiles, shrowled channel impeller for large sewers.

D. Shaft: Stainless Steel.

E. Bearings: Ball bearings.

F. Servicing: Slide-away automatic coupling consisting of discharge elbow secure to sump floor,
guide pipes, lifting chain and chain hooks.

G. Motor control panel containing selector switch across- the-line electric motor starters with
ambient compensated quick trip overloads in each phase with manual trip button and reset
button, circuit breaker, control transformer, electro mechanical alternator, hand-off-automatic
selector switches, pilot lights, high water alarm pilot light, reset button and alarm horn.

H. System operation: Upon rise in water level the lead pump cut-in. The 2nd pump cuts-in if the
water level rises or the lead pump fail to start, the third and other pumps cut-in in the same
manner. When the high/high level is reached alarm will be energies. The pumps will stop in
the reverse sequence. The pumps and alarm will be operated by level switches. Counter to
revise the operation of lead lag pump upon restart of system.

I. Alarms: The following alarms will be grouped to provide one remote alarm which will be
monitored by the BMS (where specified).

1. High/high water level

2. Low/low water level
3. Pump fail to start.

J. The Pump(s) Status ON-OFF will be monitored by the BMS (where specified).

SECTION 15450 – PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 4/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.5 FILTER.

Filter : Epoxy lined steel or GRP Construction or as specified.

Valve manual : Manual, multiport, pneumatic or hydraulically operated.
Media : AG or activated Carbon as specified.
Filtration rate : 5 gpm / sq.ft or as specified.
Operation : Back wash by pressure differential across filter.
Accessories : Pressure relief valves drain, and pressure gages.
Filters shall be UL listed and ASME certified.

2.6 PRESSURE VESSEL - HYDROPNEUMATIC TANK.

A. Tank: Steel tank ASTM stamped factory painted from outside and epoxy finished from inside
complete with air charging nozzle and valve on top and water connection on bottom and
complete with steel leg or rim.

B. Membrane: Hydropneumatic type of rubber membrane.

C. Accessories: Pressure switch and pressure relief valve.

2.7 CHEMICAL DOSING.

A. Regulator: Continuously monitor pH and chlorine levels and control chemical feed pumps.
Maintain pH of 7.5 and free chlorine residual of 0.5 ppm. Mount regulator in surface mounted
general purpose enclosure of fiberglass construction and incorporate:

1. On/Off Switch.
2. Green light to indicate regulator is energized.
3. Toggle switches for chemical feed pumps, with off, manual and automatic positions.
4. Relays for direct switching of pump motors.
5. Yellow lights to indicate pump operation.
6. Red lights for abnormal conditions.
7. Interlock to prevent chlorine feed when pH is abnormal.
8. 3 inch (80 mm) meters for continuous display of pH and chlorine levels.
9. Calibration controls for pH and chlorine.

B. Sensors: Electrode with coaxial cable for attachment to regulator.

C. Flow Switch: Shuts down controller on no flow through sampling line.

D. Liquid Chlorinator: System consisting of tank with injector pump to feed liquid chlorine
(bleach).

1. Solution Metering Pump: Positive displacement, diaphragm pump with adjustable flow
rate, thermoplastic construction, continuous - duty fully enclosed electric motor and drive,
and relief valve.

2. Solution Tanks: Polyethylene, self-supporting, molded fiberglass cover with recess for
mounting pump and liquid switch and direct reading scale.

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION.

SECTION 15450 – PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 5/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping, gas venting electrical work to achieve
operating system.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION.

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.

C. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve
and balancing valve on discharge.

D. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent
to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on
pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches (100 mm) and over.

E. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation. Pumps should be are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and
operate within 25 percent of midpoint of publishing maximum efficiency curve.

F. Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 15450 – PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 6/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15481

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM

PART-1. GENERAL:

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. The work under this section consists of furnishings, installations, testing and commissioning of
the non-medical compressed air system as indicated on the drawings and specified below.

B. Related Sections.

1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.

3. Section 15060 Hangers and Supports.
4. Section 15075 Mechanical Identification: ( Piping System ).
5. Section 15070 Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control.

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.
D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.
E. ASME B16.26 - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
F. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
G. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
H. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
I. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and
Seamless for Ordinary Uses.
J. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
Elevated Temperatures.
K. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
L. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
M. ASTM D2513 - Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings.
N. ASTM D2683 - Socket-Type-Polyethelene Fillings for Outside Diameter - Controlled
Polyethelene Pipe.
O. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS.

A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate piping system schematic with electrical characteristics and
connection requirements.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature with capacity, weight and electrical
characteristics and connections requirements.

D. Test Reports: Submit inspector’s certificate for air receiver for inclusion in Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.

E. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate hoisting and setting requirements, starting

procedures.

1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.

A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.

B. Record actual locations of equipment and components. Modify shop drawings to indicate final
locations.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.

B. Operation Data: Submit for air compressor, air receiver and accessories, after cooler,
refrigerated air dryer, and pressure reducing station.

SECTION 15481 – COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 1/3

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

C. Maintenance Data: Submit for air compressor, air receiver and accessories, after cooler,
refrigerated air dryer, and pressure reducing station.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.

A. Deliver, store and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15010.

B. Accept air compressors, refrigerated air dryer on site in factory fabricated containers with
shipping skids and plastic pipe end protectors in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect piping and equipment from weather and construction traffic.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year manufacture warranty effective from substantial completion of all equipment
and products supplied under provision of Section 15010.

1.8 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the full installation for one year from substantial completion.

B. The guarantee shall cover materials and labour for the complete system as covered in Section
15010.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS.

A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions 15010.

B. Provide compressor oil for one oil change.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS.

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 black seamed, Schedule 40.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type.

2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1 or ANSI B31.9 ASME Sec 1.

B. Copper Tubing : ASTM B88, Type K hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.

2. Joints : ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

2.2 VALVES.

A. GATE VALVES
Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, solder
or threaded ends.

B. BALL VALVES
Bronze one or two piece body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring,
lever handle solder or threaded ends with union.

C. SWING CHECK VALVES

Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends.

D. AIR OUTLETS
Quick Connector: 3/8 1/4 inch (10 6 mm) brass, snap on connector with self closing valve.

2.3 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS.

A. Unions:

1. Ferrous Pipe: 150 psig (1 034 kPa) malleable iron threaded unions.

SECTION 15481 – COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 2/3

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2. Copper Tube and Pipe: 150 psig (1 034 kPa) bronze unions with soldered joints.

B. Dielectric Connections:

1. Union with galvanized threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation
barrier.

C. Flexible Connector:

1. Neoprene with brass threaded connectors.

2.4 AIR COMPRESSOR UNIT.

A. Description.

Screw type compressors with integrated control panels. Supplied by Client.

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install compressor unit on concrete housekeeping pad.

C. Install compressor unit on vibration isolators. Level and bolt in place.

D. Make air cock and drain connection on horizontal casing.

E. Install line size gate valve and check valve on compressor discharge.

F. Install replaceable cartridge type filter silencer of adequate capacity for each compressor.

G. Install valved bypass around air dryer. Factory insulate inlet and outlet connections.

H. Install take off to outlets from top of main, with shut off valve after take off. Slope take off
piping to outlets.

I. Install compressed air couplings, female quick connectors, and pressure gages where outlets
are indicated.

J. Install tees instead of elbows at changes in direction of piping. Fit open end of each tee with
plug.

K. Identify piping system and components to Section 15075.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15481 – COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 3/3

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15510

HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL:

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work under this section consists of furnishing, installation and commissioning of the
hydronic piping system as indicated on the drawings and specified below.

B. RELATED SECTIONS

1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.

2. Section 15125 Piping Expansion Compensation.
3. Section 15075 Mechanical Identification.
4. Section 15070 Vibration Isolator.
5. Section 15080 Mechanical Insulation.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 -Qualifications Standard for Welding and
Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 50 and 300.

C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

E. ASME B31.5 - Refrigerant Piping.

F. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

G. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless.

H. ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
Elevated Temperatures.

I. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

J. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.

K. ASTM D1785 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120.

L. ASTM D2235 - Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings.

M. ASTM D2241 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR-Series).

N. ASTM D2310 - Machine-Made Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe.

O. ASTM D2466 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

P. ASTM D2467 - Socket-Type Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.

Q. ASTM D2680 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

Composite-Sewer Piping.

R. ASTM D2683 - Socket-Type Polyethelene Fittings for Outside Diameter - Controlled

Polyethelene Pipe and Tubing.

S. ASTM D2751 - Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

T. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and
Fittings.

U. ASTM D3309 - Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Hot-and Cold-Water Distribution Systems.

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 1 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

V. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.

W. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

X. ASTM F845 - Plastic Insert Fittings for Polybutylene (PB) Tubing.

Y. ASTM F876 - Crosslinked Polyethelene (PEX) Tubing.

Z. ASTM F877 - Crosslinked Polyethelene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution
System.

AA. AWS A5-8 - Brazing Filler Metal.

BB. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

CC. AWWA C105 - Polyethelene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids.

DD. AWWA C110 - Ductile-Iron and Grey-Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48 in. for Water and Other
Liquids.

EE. AWWA C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Grey Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings.

FF. AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds for
Water or Other Liquids.

GG. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.

HH. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

II. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

JJ. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or
equivalent authorities.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system components are
compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide
necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union and couplings for servicing are consistently
provided.

B. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners or welded joints for hydronic piping.

C. Use unions, flanges and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus
connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other
apparatus.

D. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in systems.

E. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASTM B31.9 and MSS SP69 unless
indicated otherwise.

F. Use gate ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or
vertical risers.

G. Use globe or ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

H. Use spring loaded silent type check valves on discharge of pumps.

I. Use plug cocks for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when shut-off or
isolating valves are also provided.

J. Use double regulating valve where balancing and monitoring of flow in the systems is
required.

K. Use 20 mm gate valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping,
bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain.

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 2 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

L. Provide automatic air vents at all high points in Hydronic Systems.

1. Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser.

2. If receiver is provided, install in liquid line leaving receiver.

3. Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.

M. Refrigerant Valves

1. Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.

2. Use gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet.

3. Use gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet.

4. Use check valves on compressor discharge.

5. Use check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems.

6. Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver
shut-off valve and expansion valve.

N Strainers:

1. Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve.

2. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, use single
main liquid-line strainer.

3. On steel piping systems, use strainer in suction line.

4. Use shut-off valve on each side of strainer.

O Pressure Relief Valves: Use on ASME receivers and pipe to drain point.

P Permanent Filter-Dryers:

1. Use in low temperature systems.

2. Use in systems utilizing hermetic compressors.

3. Use filter-dryers for each solenoid valve.

Q Replaceable Cartridge Filter-Dryers:

1. Use vertically in liquid line adjacent to receivers.

2. Use filter-dryers for each solenoid valve.

R Solenoid Valves:

1. Use in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down

compressor control.

2. Use in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems.

3. Use in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant
into the suction line when system shuts down.

S Receivers:

1. Use on systems 18kW and larger, sized to accommodate pump down charge.

2. Use on systems with long piping runs.

T Flexible Connectors: Utilize at or near compressors where piping configuration does not
absorb vibration.

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 3 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.4 SUBMITTALS.

A. Submit under provisions of Sections 15050.

B. Product Data: Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

C. Welders Certificate: Include welders certifications of compliance with ASME SEC. 9 or AWS
D1.1 or Lloyd’s Register or any approved local authority.

D. Manufacturer’s Installations Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining

procedures.

E. Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of refrigeration system, including equipment,

critical dimensions, and sizes.

F. Design Data and Calculations : Indicate pipe size. Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze,
multiple pipe, and riser support hangers; and provision of pipe expansion joints along with
analysis.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.

A. Submit under provisions of Section 15050.

B. Record actual locations of concealed valves.

C. Provide main valve charts and tags and controls and equipment, access doors and door tag
all equipment.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and
ASME SEC IX for welding materials and procedures.

B Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section

with minimum three years documented, experience , and with service facilities within
50km of Project.

B Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with

minimum three years documented, experience approved by manufacturer

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

A. Submit under provisions of Section 15050.

B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly
views.

1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS.

A. Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping system.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9.

C. Provide valid certificate of compliance from approved testing authority indicating approval of
welders and the tests passed.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products strictly in accordance with Manufacturer’s
recommendations and provisions in the Specification.

B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 4 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping valves and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.

E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary caps and isolating,
completed sections of the work.

1.11 WARRANTY.

A. Provide one year manufacture warranty effective from substantial completion of all equipment
and products supplied under provision of the Specification.

1.12 GUARANTEE.

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the full installation for one year from substantial completion.

B. The guarantee shall cover materials and labour for the complete system.

1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS.

A. Furnish all the extra materials required for completion of Specification.

B. Provide recommended spare parts for one year maintenance for all the equipment and
accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only.
Contractor may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer
for the approval of the Engineer.

2.2 PIPING MATERIAL:

A. Chilled Water Piping Below Grade and Tight Inaccessible Spaces Above Grade, shall be pre-
insulated as specified below:

1. Pipe : Steel pipe ASTM A53 schedule 40 0.357 inch (10 mm) wall for
sizes 12” (300 mm) and over, black, seamless

2. Fittings : ASTM A234 Forged steel welding Type.

3. Joints : AWS D1.1 Welded or grooved couplings.

4. Insulation : Factory applied Polyurethane foam with thermal conductivity of

0.14 Btu-in/hr-ft2 0F and minimum thickness of 1 inch.

5. Jacket : Factory applied UPVC Class 4 or Interwoven Fibreglass reinforced

Plastic Jacket of 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick for Jacket up to 8” (200
mm) inside diameter, 0.14 inch (3.5 mm) thick for up to 14” (350
mm) and 0.16 inch (4 mm) for up to 18” (450 mm) or Polyurethane
insulation with high density polyethylene jacket and heat shrink
sleeves.

B. Chilled Water Piping Above Grade:

1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, 0.375 inch (10 mm) wall for sizes 12 inch (300
mm) and over, black, seamless

a. Fittings : ASTM B16.3, malleable iron or ASST. A234, forged steel welding
type.

b. Joints : Threaded up to 2” AWS D1.1 welded for 2 1/2 diameter and over
or grooved couplings.

c. Insulation : Same as insulation for above grade piping ( tight space).

2. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K hard drawn.

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 5 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

a. Fittings : ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought

copper.

b. Joints : Solder, lead free, ASTM B32 95-5 tin-antimony, with melting
range 430 to 535 degrees F (220 to 280 degrees C).

2.3 CONDENSATE WATER PIPING

A Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. (For exposed location)

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper with
12mm insulation.

B. UPVC Class IV pipes with 12mm inculation (For pipes in ceiling voids)

2.4 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS

A Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 galvanized.

1. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron, or ASTM B16.3 malleable iron.

2. Joints: Threaded.

B Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.

2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 220 to
280 degrees C.

2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING

A Copper Tubing to 22 mm OD: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper.

2. Joints: Flared.

2.6 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS:

A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches (50 mm) and Under:

1. Ferrous Piping : 150 psig (1034 kPa) malleable iron, threaded.

2. Copper Pipe : Bronze, soldered joints.

B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches (50 mm):

1. Ferrous Piping : 150 psig (1034 kPa) forged steel, slip-on.

2. Copper Piping : Bronze.

3. Gaskets : 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick preformed neoprene.

C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:

1. Housing Clamps: Malleable iron galvanized to engage and lock, designed to permit some
angular deflection, contraction, and expansion.

2. Sealing Gasket : C-shape elastomer composition for operating temperature range from
-30 degrees F (-34 degrees C) to 230 degrees F (110 degrees C).

3. Accessories : Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder
end, water impervious isolation barrier.

2.7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:

A. Conform to ASME B31.9 ASTM F708 MSS SP58 MSS SP 69 MSS SP 89.

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 6 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

B. Hangers for Pipe Size 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch (13 to 38 mm): Factory hot dipped galvanized
Malleable iron Carbon Steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

C. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Factory hot dipped galvanized
Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

D. Hangers for Hot pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches (50 to 100 mm): Factory hot dipped galvanized
Carbon steel adjustable, clevis.

E. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Hot dipped galvanized Adjustable
steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.

F. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized Steel channels with welded spacers and
hanger rods.

G. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Steel channels
with welded spacers and hanger rods, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication, cast iron roll.

H. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (76 mm): Cast iron hook.

I. Wall support for pipe sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp. Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.

J. Wall Support for Hot pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and
wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. Hot dipped galvanized after
fabrication.

K. Vertical Support: Hot dipped galvanized Steel riser clamp.

L. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange,
and concrete pier or galvanized steel support.

M. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches (100 mm): Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock
nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or galvanized steel support.

N. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and
stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or galvanized steel support.

O. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

P. Hanger Rods: Hot dipped galvanized Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on end, or
continuous threaded.

Q. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded
connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms;
size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.8 VALVES:

For valves except for Refrigerant Systems refer to Section 15110.

2.9 REFRIGERATION MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS

A Indicators:

1. Double port type, UL listed.

2. Copper or brass body, flared or solder ends.

3. Sight glass, color-coded paper moisture indicator with removable element

cartridge and plastic cap.

4. Maximum working pressure of 3450 kPa.

5. Maximum temperature of 93 degrees C.

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 7 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.10 REFRIGERATION VALVES

A Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet solder or flared
ends.

2. Phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and hand wheel.

3. Stainless steel spring, nylon seats, disc with positive back seating.

4. Maximum working pressure of 3450 kPa

5. Maximum temperature of 135 degrees C.

B Packed Angle Valves:

1. Forged brass or nickel-plated forged steel, solder or flared ends.

2. Forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat with back
seating, molded stem packing.

3. Maximum working pressure of 3450 kPa

4. Maximum temperature of 135 degrees C.

C Ball Valves:

1. Two piece bolted, forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube
extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene
ring stem seals

2. Maximum working pressure of 3450 kPa and

3. Maximum temperature of 149 degrees C.

D Service Valves: Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core,
integral ball check valve, flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 3450 kPa.

2.11 REFRIGERATION STRAINERS

A Straight Line or Angle Line Type: Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and
replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass;
for maximum working pressure of 2960 kPa.

B Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type: Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire
screen.

2.12 REFRIGERATION CHECK VALVES

A Globe Type: Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal,
brass guide and disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc;
for maximum working pressure of 3450 kPa and maximum temperature of 149 degrees C.

B Straight Through Type: spring, neoprene seat; for maximum working pressure of 3450
kPa and maximum temperature of 121 degrees C.

2.13 REFRIGERATION PRESSURE REGULATORS

A Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting, pilot operated with remote pressure
pilot, adjustable over 0 to 550 kPa range, for maximum working pressure of 3100 kPa.

2.14 REFRIGERATION PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and
stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB; for standard setting;
selected to ASHRAE 15.

2.15 REFRIGERATION FILTER-DRIERS

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 8 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type:

1. Shell: ARI 710, UL listed, brass, removable cap, for maximum working pressure
of 3450 kPa outside diameter size connections.

2. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless steel support.

3. Filter/Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid core sieve with activated alumina.

4. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded bonded core of activated charcoal with integral
gaskets.

B Permanent Straight Through Type:

1. ARI 710, UL listed, steel shell with molded desiccant filter core, for maximum
working pressure of 3450 kPa.

2.16 REFRIGERATION SOLENOID VALVES

A Valve: ARI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass or steel, body and internal parts, synthetic
seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly, integral strainer, with flared, solder, or
threaded ends; for maximum working pressure of 3450 kPa. Stem shall permit manual
operation in case of coil failure.

B Coil Assembly: UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and
fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box.

C Electrical Characteristics: single phase, 50 Hz.

2.17 REFRIGERATION EXPANSION VALVES

A Angle or Straight Through Type: ARI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body,
internal or external equalizer, bleed hole, mechanical pressure limit (maximum operating
pressure MOP feature), non-adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with
non-replaceable, capillary tube and remote sensing bulb.

B Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available

pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure
and minimum 6 degrees C superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and
excessively oversized at part load.

2.18 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES

A Valve:

1. Brass bodies with flared or solder connection, needle valve with floating needle
and machined seat, stepper motor drive.

2. Capacity: Refer to drawings

3. Electrical Characteristics: refer to drawings

B Evaporation Control System:

1. Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, proportional integral

control with adaptive superheat, maximum operating pressure function, pre-
selection allowance for electrical defrost and hot gas bypass.

2. Electrical Characteristics: 12 VA, 220 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.

C Refrigeration System Control: Electronic stand alone microprocessor based unit in

enclosed case, with proportional integral control of valve, on/off thermostat, alpha numeric
LCD screen, compatibility with BMS with no interface, air temperature alarm (high and
low), high and low refrigerant pressure cutouts, oil pressure cutouts, built-in motor thermal
cutouts, anti-cycling time delay, solenoid valve control, liquid injection adaptive superheat
control, maximum operating pressure function, weekly programmable with override and
night setback thermostat, remote sensors timer for defrost control.

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 9 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.19 REFRIGERATION RECEIVERS

A Internal Diameter 150 mm and Smaller: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 2760 kPa
maximum pressure rating, with taps for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.

B Internal Diameter Over 150 mm: ARI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped in
accordance with ASME SEC 8D; 2760 kPa with taps for liquid inlet and outlet valves,
pressure relief valve , and magnetic liquid level indicator.

2.20 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of exterior braiding, minimum 230 mm
long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 3450 kPa.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

E After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A Pre-insulated underground pipes shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Underground pipes shall be installed in an underground water tight concrete
trench with warning tape placed throughout the length. Excavation and backfilling shall be strickly in
accordance with Section 02200 - EATHWORKS. Thrust blocks shall be provided strictly as per the
Uniform Plumbing Codes requirement.

B Air vents at all high points and drain points at all the low points shall be provided for proper
functioning.

C Install chilled water, and condensate water in conformance with ASME B31.5.

D Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.

E Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.

F Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

G Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls, floors, walkways and roads with concrete
encasement.

H Pipe expansion, in general, is to be absorbed in bends, swing joints, expansion loops, and offsets.
All piping main, branches and runouts shall be installed to allow for free expanasion and
contraction without developing leaks or undue stressing of pipe. Stresses shall be within allowable
limits of ANSI B31.1 for pressure piping. Contractor is responsible to submit pipe expansion and
stress analysis and the details of anchors, expansion joints, guides, expansion loops and swing
joints where required, for review and approval of the Engineer.

I Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.

2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.

3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 100
mm.

4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 10 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt
with recessed square steel plate and nut above, flush with top of recessed into and
grouted flush with slab.

J Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Provide supports for piping, suitable for grading, alignment, and movement due to expansion.
Locate supports within 600mm of each change in direction of piping. Provide at least three
supports for each expansion loop. Select all pipe supports with minimum safety factor of 5
based on ultimate tensil strength of material. Horizontal supports shall consist of upper
attachment, threaded hanger rod (s) with turnbuckles and lower attachment. Verical supports
shall be provided as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

VIBRATION ISOLATION expansion of piping and earthquake restraint attachments shall be

provided where applicable.

2. Install in accordance with ASTM B31.9, ASTM F708, and, MSS SP89,.

3. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

4. Install hangers to provide minimum 13 mm space between finished covering and adjacent
work.

5. Place hangers within 300 mm of each horizontal elbow.

6. Use hangers with 38 mm minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

7. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.

8. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.

9. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping

10. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

K Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation
and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15060.

L Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access
doors with Architectural Sections..

M Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of
pipe level.

1. Slope steam piping one inch in 0.25 percent in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers to
maintain bottom of pipe level.

2. Slope steam condensate piping 0.25 percent. Provide drip trap assembly at low points and
before control valves. Run condensate lines from trap to nearest condensate receiver.
Provide loop vents over trapped sections.

N Arrange refrigeration piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and
provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.

O Flood refrigerant piping system with nitrogen when brazing.

P Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

Q Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer to
Section 09900.

R Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

S Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 15080.

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 11 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

T Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant.

U Provide replaceable cartridge filter-dryers, with isolation valves and bypass with valve.

V Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line.

W Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to
evaporator.

X Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.

Y Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.

Z Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A Section 015950 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.

C Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 1470 kPa.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15500 – HYDRONIC PIPING 12 / 12

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15671

AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT

PART-1 GENERAL:

1.1 DESCRIPTION.

A. The work under this section consists of furnishings, installation, testing and commissioning as
shown on the drawings and specified below.

B. Related Sections.

1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirement.

2. Section 15070 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control
3. Section 15080 Mechanical Insulation.

1.2 REFERENCES.

A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

B. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in new Building Design.
C. ANSI/NEMA MG-1 - Motors and Generators.
D. ANSI/UL 207 - Refrigerant -Containing Components and Accessories, Non-Electrical.
E. ANSI/UL 303 - Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Condensing, and Air-Source Heat Pump
Equipment.
F. ANSI-UL - 465 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners.
G.. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment.
H. ARI 520 - Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors, Compressor Units and Condensing
Units.
I. ASHRAE 14 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Condensing Units.
J. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
K. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or
equivalent authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS.

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section

15010.

B. Submit shop drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loading,
required clearances, and locations and size of field connections. Include schematic layouts
showings condensing units, cooling coils, refrigerant piping, and accessories required for
complete system.

C. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights specialties and accessories, electrical
nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.

E. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1.

B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance instructions, parts lists, controls and accessories.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.

A. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting
units.

B. Protect units on site from physical damage. Protect coils from chemicals.

1.6 WARRANTY.

A. Provide one year manufacture warranty effective from substantial completion of all equipment
and products supplied.

1.7 GUARANTEE.

SECTION 15671 – AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT 1/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the full installation for one year from substantial completion.

B. The guarantee shall cover materials and labour for the complete system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only.
Contractor may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer
for the approval of the Engineer.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS:

A. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and pre-wired units suitable for outdoor use
consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans, integral sub-cooling coil, controls,
liquid receiver, and screens.

B. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240 ANSI/UL 207 or ANSI/UL 303.
Testing shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 14.

C. Performance Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) and Coefficient of Performance (COP)
not less than prescribed by ANSI/ASHRAE 90A.

2.3 CASING:

A. House components in welded steel frame with galvanized steel panels with weather resistant,
baked enamel finish.

B. Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof panel provided with full opening
access doors. Provide mechanical interlock to disconnect power when door is opened.

C. Provide removable access doors or panels with piano hinges and quick fasteners.

2.4 CONDENSER COILS:

A. Coils: The Coils is manufactured from refrigeration quality seamless copper tube with a
secondary surface of self spacing aluminum fins (with anti-corrosion coating supplied, applied
and warranted by the unit supplier for seaside application) mechanically bonded to the tubes.
The fins shall have full drawn collars to completely cover the tubes. A sub-cooling coil shall be
an integral part of the main condenser coil. The coil is pressure tested under water to 30 bars
during manufacturing and fully dehydrated.

After assembly, the coil and associated pipe work is pressure and leak tested to 25.5 bar with
mixture of dry nitrogen and R22.

B. Coil Guard or Expanded metal. Louvered. PVC coat steel wire. with lint screens.

2.5 FANS AND MOTORS:

A. Vertical discharge direct or belt driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on
discharge. Equip with roller or ball bearings with grease fittings extended to outside of casing.

C. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, single phase permanent split capacitor or 3
phase, with permanent lubricated ball bearings and built in current and thermal overload
protection.

C. Horizontal discharge, double width, double inlet forward curved or backward inclined centrifugal
type condenser fans, equipped with roller or ball bearings with grease fittings extended to
outside of casing, V-belt drive with belt guard.

D. Motors as indicated, in compliance with Division 16 - ELECTRICAL.

2.6 COMPRESSORS

A. Construction: Hermetic reciprocating for up to 5 tons and semi hermetic for larger capacities
type with heat treated forged steel or cast iron shafts, aluminum alloy connecting rods,
automotive type pistons, rings to prevent gas leakage, suction and discharge valves, and
sealing surface immersed in oil.

SECTION 15671 – AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT 2/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

B. Mounting: Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts and mount on spring vibration
isolators.

C. Lubrication System: Reversible, positive displacement oil pump with oil charging valve, oil level
sight glass, oil filter, and magnetic plug or strainer.

D. Capacity Reduction Equipment: Suction valve unloaders, with lifting mechanism operated by
electrically actuated solenoid valve. Provide for unloaded compressor start. Control
unloading from suction pressure and room thermostat.

E. Motor: Constant speed suction gas cooled with electronic sensor and winding over temperature
protection, designed for across-the-line starting. Furnish with starter.

F. Crankcase Heater: Evaporates refrigerant returning to crankcase during shut down. Energize
heater when compressor is not operating.

2.7 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT

A. Provide each unit with refrigerant circuits, factory supplied and piped.

B. Provide the following for each refrigerant circuit:

1. Filter dryer.
2. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.
3. Thermal expansion valve for maximum operating pressure.
4. Insulated suction line.
5. Suction and liquid line service valves and gage ports.
6. Liquid line solenoid valve.
7. Charging valve.
8. Discharge line check valve.
9. Compressor discharge service valve.
10. Condenser pressure relief valve.

C. For heat pump units, provide reversing valve, suction line accumulator, discharge muffler, flow
control check valve, and solid-state defrost control utilizing thermisters.

2.8 CONTROLS:

A. On unit, mount weatherproof steel control panel, NEMA 250, containing power and control
wiring, molded case disconnect switch, factory wired with single point power connection.

B. For each compressor, provide across-the-line or part winding starter, non-recycling compressor
overload, starter relay, and control power transformer or terminal for controls power. Provide
manual reset current overload protection. For each condenser fan, provide across-the- line
starter with starter relay.

C. Provide the following safety controls arranged so that operating any one will shut down machine
and require manual reset:

1. High discharge pressure switch (manual reset) for each compressor.

2. Low suction pressure switch (automatic reset) for each compressor.

3. Oil Pressure switch (manual reset).

D. Provide the following operating controls:

1. The Thermostat, located in the supplied air room with the outdoor reset controls and the
return air temperature cycles the compressors, activates cylinder unloaders, and activates
solenoid valves in refrigerant circuit.

2. A Five minute delay timer prevents compressor from short cycling.

3. Periodic pump-out timer to pump down on high evaporator refrigerant pressure.

4. Hot gas bypass sized for minimum compressor loading, on one compressor only,
bypasses hot refrigerant gas to evaporator.

5. Lead-lag switch to alternate compressor operation.

SECTION 15671 – AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT 3/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

6. Low ambient thermostat to lock out compressor at low ambient temperatures.

E. Provide pre-piped gage board with pressure gages for suction and discharge refrigerant
pressures, and oil pressures for each compressor.

F. For multiple units, provide remote mounted sequence panel to allow operation with lead-lag
switching and time delay timer.

G. Provide thermostat to control, compressor stages and unloading to maintain the required
temperature

H Provide electric solid state microcomputer based room thermostat, located as indicated. in
service area with remote sensor located as indicated on the drawings or as per Engineer’s
instructions.

I. Room thermostat shall be DDC as detailed on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

3.1 INSTALLATION.

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Division 16 Related Section and Electrical
drawings.

C. Install units on vibration isolation. Refer to Section 15070.

D. Install units on concrete base as indicated.

3.2 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES:

A. Prepare and start systems .

B. Provide initial and cooling season start-up, and winter season shut down during first year of
operation, including routine servicing and check out.

C. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigerant circuit. Replace losses of
refrigerant and oil.

D. Inspect and test for refrigerant leaks every two months during first year of operation.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 15671 – AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT 4/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15780

PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division-1 Specification sections, and Division-15 Basic Mechanical Requirements sections apply to
work of this section.

B. Division-l5 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of packaged air conditioning units work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of packaged air conditioners specified in this section include the following:

1. Packaged Roof Top Unit.

2. Split System A/C Units.

C. Other Division-15 sections are to be referred to for piping, ductwork, specialties, accessories and
controls required in conjunction with packaged air conditioning unit’s work.

D. Insulation works required in conjunction with packaged air conditioning unit’s work are specified in
other Division-15 sections, and are included as work of this section.

E. Electrical woks including power supply wiring, control wiring and interlock wiring are to be provided as
work of Division-15 section “Electrical Requirements For Mechanical Equipment" and in compliance
with requirements of Divisions 15 and 16.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: manufacturer's technical product data are to be submitted for packaged air
conditioning units including performance data, dimensional data and installation instructions. Data to
include rated sensible and latent capacities of selected model at specified conditions, required
clearances for ventilation air circulation and or maintenance, furnished specialties, and accessories;
and installation and startup instructions.

B. Wiring Diagrams: manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring and control wiring to
air conditioning units are to be submitted.

C. Maintenance Data: maintenance data for air conditioning units equipment controls and accessories;
including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide are to be submitted. This data, product data, and
wiring diagrams to be included in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Division 1
and Division 15.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualification: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of packaged air conditioning

units of types, characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Manufacturer to be approved by an
independent quality assurance and testing authority.

B. Contractor's Qualifications: firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects
with packaged air conditioning units similar to that required for project.

SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 1/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. ARI Compliance: capacity and noise ratings of packaged air conditioning units are to be in
accordance with ARI Standards 210/240, 340/360/365and 270 "Standards for Commercial and
Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment".

B. ASHRAE Compliance: refrigerating systems of packaged air conditioning units are to be constructed
in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".

C. UL Compliance: packaged air conditioning units are to be UL-listed and labeled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Paint Finish: equipment to have factory applied finish coat of machinery enamel unless otherwise
specified.

B. Equipment Supplier to be furnished with all necessary data such as available electric current
characteristics, maximum and minimum ambient temperatures and humidifies, altitude and other
particular site conditions so that manufacturer will supply equipment to specifically suit Site
conditions particularly for necessary debating in capacity for altitude and temperature, necessary
class of insulation for electric motors, high temperatures and humidifies, sandy environment etc.

C. Equipment Selection: equipment capacities to be selected at actual Site conditions with debating
factors applied for altitude and ambient temperatures.

D. Electric Motors to conform with the specification for electric motors given under Division-15 Basic
Mechanical Requirements section " Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment" and with re-
quirements given under equipment specifications for particular motor driving that equipment.

E. Equipment to be supplied from factory complete with all necessary accessories and components that
are standard items of manufacturer or as recommended by him for good, safe and efficient operation
of equipment irrespective of whether these are specified or not.

2.2 PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNIT

A. The package roof top unit is to be of the single package, roof top, air cooled type, factory assembled,
prewired, tested and ready for operation suitable for cooling with electric heating, mounted on a
vibration isolation concrete pad with horizontal or downward discharge and return air connections as
shown on Drawings.

B. The unit is to consist basically of a compressor - condenser section and an indoor fan - evaporator
section, fresh air and return air section and all their associated accessories and controls, electric
heating coil section, filter sections, mixing box and all necessary accessories and operating and
safety controls for proper operation.

C. Unit is to be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 340 / 360. Unit is to be designed to conform to
ANSI / ASHRAE 15, latest revision, UL Standard 1995 and National Electric Code (USA ). Insulation
and adhesives are to meet NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation.

D. Units are to have two independent refrigeration circuits. Each circuit is to have its own
compressor(s), expansion devices, electrical circuit and accessories. Units to be complete with
factory wiring, piping, refrigerant charge ( R22 ), operating oil charge, microprocessor-based control
system and associated hardware, and all special features required prior to field start-up.

E. Unit Cabinet: to be constructed of hot dip galvanized steel ( G90 ), bowdlerized and primer-

F. Coated on both sides and coated with a baked polyester thermosetting powder coating finish on the
outer surface.

E. Unit Cabinet: sides are to have man size insulated hinged access doors for easy access to the
control box and other areas requiring servicing. Each door is to seal against a rubber gasket to
prevent air and water leakage and to be equipped to permit ease and safety during servicing.

SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 2/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

F. Unit Cabinet: interior cabinet surfaces are to be insulated with flexible fire-retardant dual-density
fiberglass blanket, coated on the air side. Insulation coating is to be cleanable and is to contain an
EPA registered immobilized anti-microbial agent to effectively resist the growth of bacteria and fungi.
Interior cabinet surfaces within supply fan discharge section are to be lined with sheet metal on all
surfaces, insulated on the side opposite the air stream.

G. Unit Cabinet: unit is to contain a sloped drain pan fabricated of hot dipped galvanized steel (G90)
designation according to ASTM Standard A653. Unit is to contain a factory-installed non-ferrous main
condensate drain connection.

H. Evaporator Fans: double-width, double-inlet, centrifugal belt driven forward-curve type, statically and
dynamically balanced, with single outlet discharge. Mounted on structural steel skid. Solid fan shaft
construction. Fan shaft bearings to be of the pillow block type with lubrication provisions and to have
a life of 200,000 hours at design operating conditions in accordance with ANSI B3.15. Adjustable
pitch pulley drive. Fans are to be equipped with spring vibration isolators each with 2” deflection.
Supply fan is to be factory provided with variable frequency drive.

I. Evaporator coils: intertwined circuiting constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to

seamless copper tubes. Full-face active type during full and part load conditions. Coils are to be leak
tested at 150 psig and pressure tested at 450 psig.

J. Heating Section: electric resistance heaters are to be factory installed with disconnect switch, open
wire chrome element type, insulated with ceramic bushings, and are to include operating and safety
controls (minimum 2 stage operating controls ).

K. Filters: Unit is to be factory equipped with 2-in. pre-filter section with cleanable aluminum filters, and a
main filter section accommodating bag filters with an average efficiency of 90% based on testing per
ASHRAE Standard 52.

L. Compressors: are to be of the reciprocating semi-hermetic serviceable type with suitable spring
vibration isolators. Equipped with a suction-cutoff type electrically controlled unloader(s). Each
compressor is to be equipped with an automatically reversible oil pump, operating oil charge, insert-
type crank-case heater to prevent refrigerant migration to the compressor. Equipped with suction and
discharge service valves. Maximum operating speed of 1500 rpm. Compressor start is to be of the
part-wind type.

M. Refrigerant Components: unit is to be equipped with dual refrigerant circuits, each containing:

1. Suction and discharge service valves.

2. Suction and discharge pressure transducers.
3. Suction gas thermistors.
4. Filter drier.
5. Moisture indicating sight glass.
6. Thermostatic expansion valve.
7. Fusible plug.

N. Condenser fans: direct-driven propeller type, low noise, low rpm. Discharge air vertically upward.
Protected by PVC-coated steel wire safety guards. Statically and dynamically balanced. Three-
phase, totally enclosed fan cooled motors, with permanently lubricated ball bearings and internal
over temperature protection. Motors are to be suitable for continuous operation in ambient
temperatures of 45° C.

O. Condenser Coils: constructed of copper fins mechanically bonded to copper fins. Air-cooled
condenser coils are to be leak tested at 150 psig and pressure tested at 450 psig. Expanded

P. Metal grille complete with support retainers and fasteners is to be provided for protection of
condenser coils.

Q. Controls: control is to be accomplished through the use of a factory-installed, microprocessor-

R. Based control system and associated electronic and electrical hardware.

1. Monitoring: control system is to determine control sequences through monitoring

2. the following operational variables:

a. Day and time.

b.

SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 3/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

c. Schedule (Unoccupied/Occupied).
d.
e. Set points (Unoccupied/Occupied, others)
f.
g. Space temperature.
h.
i. Outdoor-air temperature.
j.
k. Outdoor-air enthalpy.
l.
m. Unit supply-air temperature.
n.
o. Unit return-air temperature.
p.
q. Supply-air fan status.
r.
s. Accessory and/or field-supplied sensors. Function switches and/or signals.

3. Functions: controls are to be capable of performing the following functions:

a. Capacity control based on discharge-air temperature and compensated by rate of

change of return-air temperature. Capacity control is to be accomplished through the
use of electric unloaders and compressor staging.

b. Perform a quick test to check the status of all input and output signals to the control
system using diagnostic display module.

c. Heating control is to provide space temperature control for morning warm-up.

d. Alerts and Alarms: control is to continuously monitor all sensor inputs and control
outputs to ensure safe and proper system operation. Alerts are to be generated
whenever sensor conditions have gone outside user-configured criteria for
acceptability. Alarms are to be initiated when unit control detects that a sensor input
value is outside its valid range (indicating a defective device or connection that
prevents full unit operation), that output has not functioned as expected, or that a
safety device has tripped. Twelve alerts and 40 alarms are to be available. Current
alarms are to be maintained in STATUS function; up to 9 (current or re-set) are to be
stored in HISTORY function for recall.

e. Lead-lag function are to distribute starts between the two refrigeration circuits to
equalize the running time on the two circuits.

f. Refrigeration system pressures and temperatures (superheat) are to be monitored

via pressure transducers and thermistors. Alarms for low pressure, high pressure,
low superheat and high superheat are to be provided.

S. Safeties: unit components are to be equipped with the following protections:

1. Compressors:
a. Overcurrent using calibrated circuit breakers (shuts down individual compressor).

b. Crankcase heaters.

c. High-pressure switch (shuts down individual compressor, automatic reset type).

d. Low-pressure switch (shuts down individual compressor, automatic reset type).

e. Check filter switch.

2. Belt-Drive Fan Motors:

a. Overcurrent protection manual reset circuit breakers.

3. Heating Section:

a. Automatic reset high-temperature limit switches.

SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 4/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

b. Heat limiters (fusible links).

c. Overcurrent protection manual reset circuit breakers.

d. Branch circuit protection.

S. Diagnostics:

1. Diagnostic display module is to be capable of indicating a safety lockout condition (alarm)

through an expandable scrolling display.

2. Diagnostic display module is to also be capable of indicating an alert condition which does not
lock out the unit, but informs the system monitor of a condition which could be

3. Detrimental to either the unit or the comfort of the occupants if allowed to continue.

4. Diagnostic module must also be capable of displaying outputs of microprocessor-controlled

"quick test" to verify operation of every thermistor, actuator motor, fan, and compressor
before unit is started.

T. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers which may be incorporated

in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: or approved
York (U.S.A.)
Carrier (U.S.A.)
Trane (U.S.A.)

2.3 SPLIT SYSTEM A/C UNITS

A. General: system is to comprise of an indoor unit, an air cooled outdoor unit and the necessary
refrigerant copper piping, accessories and controls. The air conditioning unit is to be capable of
handling the cooling loads when operating in the ambient design conditions at medium fan speed.

B. Outdoor Unit: the outdoor unit is to be of the air cooled, vertical air discharge type, designed to
operate at specified ambient outdoor temperature and of capacity as shown on the drawings and with
the following features:

1. The outdoor unit is to comprise compressors, condenser fans and motors, condenser coils,
condensate drain pan, refrigeration accessories and safety and operating controls all
assembled in a common casing and piped, wired and tested at the factory. The unit is to be
supplied from the factory with an operating charge of refrigerant and dehydrated compressor
oil.

2. The compressors are to be of the hermetic type with crankcase heater and built in thermal
overload protection. The compressors are to be mounted on vibration isolators in separate
isolated sections from the condenser coil and fans.

3. The condenser fans are to be of the low speed axial type, arranged for vertical discharge,
weatherproofed, statically and dynamically balanced and direct driven by a totally enclosed,
permanently lubricated, resiliently mounted electric motor with Class F insulation and built-in
thermal overload protection.

4. The condenser coils are to be constructed of heavy gauge seamless copper tubes
mechanically bonded to aluminum plate fins. The coils are to have protection guards and to
be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory.

5. The outdoor unit casing is to be of heavy gauge galvanized, steel, zinc phosphatized and
finished with baked enamel and the fan guards are to be adequately protected against
corrosion. The casing is to be fully weatherproofed for outdoor installation. It is to be provided
with openings for power and refrigerant connections and with removable panels for easy
access to all internal components.

6. Refrigerant Accessories: the unit is to be provided with all necessary refrigeration

accessories which are to include but not necessarily be limited to the following:

SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 5/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

a. Filter-dryers.
b. Suction and discharge shut-off valves.
c. Discharge line check valves.
d. 4 way reversing valve.

7. Controls: the unit is to be provided with all necessary safety and operating controls that are
to include but not necessarily be limited to the following :

a. High and low pressure switches.

b. Compressor overload safety devices.
c. Defrost System.
d. Timed compressor short cycle protection

C. Indoor Unit: to be of the wall mounted decorative type or of the concealed type, centrifugal or
tangential fan, direct driven type, complete with electric motor, direct

D. Expansion coil, air filters, condensate drain pan and accessories. Unit is to have the following
features:

1. For wall mounted exposed type, the fan and coil cabinet is to be of enamel coated rigid
plastic with louvered front access panel. Cabinet to have integral directional blades and
automatic swing air sweeping louvers.

2. The coil is to be of heavy wall seamless copper tubes bonded to aluminum fins by
mechanical expansion complete with expansion device.

3. The fan is to be centrifugal or tangential type, statically and dynamically balanced.

4. The motor is to be of the squirrel cage induction type with thermal overload protection.

5. The filters are to be 1/2" thick cleanable type.

6. Indoor unit is to be of the quiet operation type and its sound criteria is not exceed NC 35.

E. System Control: For exposed wall mounted units, the system is to be equipped with a
microprocessor based room wall mounted or remote infra-red control unit to permit manual starting
and automatic continuous operation whenever the thermostat requires and the protection devices
allow. The control unit is to comprise at least the following:

a. ON-OFF switch.

b. Heating / Fan/Cooling switch.

c. 3 speed fan switch.

d. Thermostat.

e. Thermometer.

f. 24 Hr Timer.

g. Dehumidification function.

h. Sleep mode operation.

F. Combination Ratings: indoor and outdoor units are to be factory matched and provided with
combination performance ratings for specified inside and outside operating conditions.

G. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers which may be incorporated

in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: or approved equal

York (U.S.A).
Carrier (U.S.A).
Trane (U.S.A).

2.4 INSULATION

SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 6/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

General: insulation works are to be provided in compliance with Division-l5 Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods section "Mechanical Insulation".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Inspection: areas and conditions under which packaged air conditioning units are to be installed are
to be inspected. Work is not to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Areas to receive units are to be checked for compliance with installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting its performance.

C. Piping; accessories; hangers, supports, and anchors; valves; controls; and equipment supports are to
be installed as indicated for a complete installation and as specified in other sections of Division 15.

3.2 CONCRETE

A. Concrete bases of dimensions required for packaged air conditioning units are to be constructed and
installed in compliance with Miscellaneous Details drawings and Division 15 Basic Mechanical
Requirements section "Builder's Work".

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Packaged air conditioning units are to be installed plumb and level in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, rough in drawings and referenced standards. Manufacturer's
recommended clearances are to be respected.

B. Floor-mounted outdoor and indoor units are to be supported on 100 mm thick concrete pad,
minimum 150 mm larger on each side than base of unit. Anchor-bolt inserts to be cast into pad. Roof-
mounted outdoor units are to be provided with extra vibration isolating material installed under
concrete pad.

C. Packaged roof top units are to be installed on roof curbs as per manufacturer installation
recommendations and shop drawings. Roof penetrations and flashings are to be properly
coordinated.

D. Decorative Indoor Units: are to be mounted on wall as high as possible to maintain greatest
headroom possible and on factory supplied wall supports. All piping connections are to be concealed.

E. Suspended Concealed Indoor Units: are to be hung with rod-type hangers with vibration isolators
anchored to building structure. Units are to be mounted in such a way so as to provide adequate
clearance all around unit for maintenance and for installation of all services and all other trades
works.

F. Protection: units are to be protected with protective covers during balance of construction.

G. Ductwork: supply and return ducts and outside air duct are to be connected to unit with flexible duct
connections. Transitions are to be provided to exactly match unit duct connection size. Outside air
duct to be provided with manual damper, quadrant and lock.

H. Refrigerant Piping: to be provided as indicated, including all valves, specialties, controls and
accessories as shown on Miscellaneous Details Drawings.

I. Drain Piping: unit drain to be connected to nearest indirect waste connection or condensate drain
piping system. Drain pan to be provided with trap with a water seal at least 1" deeper than suction
pressure of fan for draw-through units, or discharge pressure for blow-through units. Cleanout plug to
be provided in trap bottom.

3.4 INSULATION

A. Insulation works are to be installed in accordance with Division-l5 Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods section "Mechanical Insulation".

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 7/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. General: packaged air conditioning units are to be tested, inspected and started in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

B. Units and piping are to be dehydrated, vacuum pumped and charged with specified refrigerant in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Filters are to be checked and cleaned.

D. Motors and drives are to be checked.

E. Operating and safety control are to be tested and adjusted. Damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment are to be replaced.

F. Owner's maintenance personnel are to be trained on procedures and schedules related to start-up
and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance.

3.6 CLEANING

A. General: after construction is completed, including painting, unit exposed surfaces are to be cleaned
and terminal coils and inside of cabinets are to be vacuum cleaned.

B. Any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets are to be retouched using finish
materials furnished by manufacturer.

C. New filter units are to be installed for all indoor units requiring same.

1.2 COMMISSIONING

A. The following final checks are to be performed before start-up:

1. Piping connections to be checked for leaks.

2. Electrical wiring installation to be verified to be in compliance with manufacturer's submittal
and installation requirements of Division 16 Sections.
3. Operation of safety controls and devices to be tested.

B. The following start up procedures are to be performed:

1. Units are to be started according to manufacturer's instructions.

2. Operating controls are to be adjusted.
3. Motor amperage to be verified to be in accordance with manufacturer's data.
4. Sound levels to be verified to be in accordance with specified criteria.

END OF SECTION 15780

SECTION 14210 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 8/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15784

UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL:

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work under this section consists of furnishings, installing, testing and commissioning the
equipment as shown on the drawings and specified below.

B. RELATED SECTIONS

1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.

2. Section 15671 Air Cooled Condensing Unit.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

B. ARI 210 - Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment.
C. The factory assembled major equipments shall be ARI Rated and UL listed or certified from CE,
TÜV or equivalent authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS.

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions for Section 15050.

B. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for
this project.

C. Indicate water, drain and electrical rough-in connections on shop drawings or product data.

E. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE.

A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1.

B. Include manufacturer’s descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions and

maintenance and repair data.

1.5 WARRANTY.

A. Provide one year manufacture warranty effective from substantial completion of all equipment
and products.

1.6 GUARANTEE.

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the full installation for one year from substantial completion.

B. The guarantee shall cover materials and labour for the complete system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for

reference only. Contractor may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local
manufacturer for the approval of the Engineer. All units shall be ARI Rated or approved equal and
motors shall be UL listed.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS.

A. Provide packaged, self-contained, factory assembled, prewired unit, consisting of cabinet,

compressor, condensing coil, evaporator fan, evaporator coil, discharge plenum, outside air
connection, heating coil, air filters, and controls.

B. Assemble units for up flow horizontal flow air delivery, in draw-through configuration as indicated.

SECTION 15784 – UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONING UNIT 1/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.3 CABINET.

A. Frame and Panels: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed access doors or
panels with quick fasteners.

B. Insulation: Minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick acoustic duct liner for lining cabinet interior.

C. Drain Pan: Stainless steel

2.4 EVAPORATOR FAN.

A. Fan: Double width, double inlet, forward curved centrifugal fan, statically and dynamically
balanced, with permanently lubricated bearings.

B. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed.
Variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves
set at mid-position as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of
the motor.

2.5 COMPRESSOR.

A. Hermetically sealed for capacities up to 5 Tons and semi hermetic for higher capacities,
resiliently mounted with positive lubrication and internal motor protection.

2.6 EVAPORATOR COIL.

A. Direct expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with factory
applied protective coating for units operating with 100% fresh air.

B. Refrigeration circuit with thermal expansion valve, filter-drier, and charging valves.

2.7 CONDENSER.

A. Coil: The coil is manufactured from seamless copper tubing with self spacing aluminum fins
(with anti-corrosion coating supplied, applied and warranted by the unit supplier for seaside
applications) mechanically bonded to the tubes. The coil is pressure tested under water to 30
bars during manufacturing and fully dehydrated.

B. Fan: The condenser fan shall be propeller type directly driven by electric induction motor. The
motor shall be weather protected, single phase open drip-proof type.

2.8 AIR FILTERS.

A. Easily removable one inch (25 mm) thick permanent cleanable 2 inch (50 mm) thick disposable
glass fiber panel filters.

2.9 DECORATIVE MINI-SPLIT UNIT

It shall be factory fabricated, assembled, tested and certified by ARI (210/240) or approved equal and
UL listed.

The design of the indoor unit shall be compact and stylish. It shall be manufactured of high quality
durable material not affected by change of temperature.

The unit shall be provided with uneven pitched cross flow fan for quiet operation not exceeding 37
dB(A) at low speed. It shall be provided with vertical and horizontal automatic swing flap and
automatically controlled wide angle louvers.

The unit with all its features shall be controlled through a wireless remote controller or wall mounted
thermostat, which shall incorporate LCD screen and space temperature reading. The fan speed shall be
controlled automatically by a micro processor to maintain the set temperature at most efficient reach.
The unit shall be of self-diagnostic digital type able to show the malfunction code on the remote
controller LCD screen. Back-up ON/OFF switch shall be provided on indoor Unit.

Where Heating is specified, the heater shall be factory installed and the unit shall be provided with hot
start system, or Unit shall have Heat Pump Cycle.

The pre-filter shall be impregnated with effective mould prevention. The filter shall be double sided
combines air cleaning electrostatic filter and deodorizing activated charcoal filter able to trap dust up to
0.01 microns. The filter shall be provided with filter cleaning indicator.

SECTION 15784 – UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONING UNIT 2/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The unit shall be of auto-restart type after power failure with non-volatile memory and 5 minutes non-
cycling delay timer. The condensing unit shall be suitable for high ambient conditions supports a piping
length of not less than 30 meters. The coil shall be with extended heat transfer area and factory coated
to provide long service life.

2.10 CONTROLS.

A. Factory wired controls shall include contactor, high and low pressure cutouts, internal winding
thermal switch for compressor, control circuit transformer, non-cycling reset relay.

B. Provide thermostat to cycle cooling, mounted within unit with 'fan-off-cool' switch allowing
continuous fan operation, or cycling fan on call for cooling.

C. Provide room thermostat to control cooling with 'cool-off' selector switch and 'auto-on' fan control
switch.

2.11 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (V R V) SYSTEM

A. Unit shall be air cooled split type multi-system air conditioner consisting of one outdoor unit and
Multiple indoor units, each having capacity to cool or heat independently for the requirement of
the rooms. Up to 19 indoor units can be connected to one outdoor unit and controlled
individually.

B. Indoor Unit:

1. The Indoor Unit shall be of ducted ceiling concealed or wall mounted type or ceiling mounted
cassette type or floor standing type or ceiling suspended type, working on R-410a. The unit
shall be complete with all accessories including electronic control valve which control
refrigerant flow rate in respond to load variations of the room. The fan shall be of the dual
suction multi-blade type and statically and dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and
vibration free operation. The unit shall be assembled, tested and charged with refrigerant at
the factory.

C. Outdoor Unit:

1. The Outdoor unit shall be a factory assembled unit housed in a sturdy weather proof casing
constructed from rust proofed mild steed panels coated with a baked enamel finish. The
outdoor unit shall be of modular in design and should be allowed for side by side installation.

2. The unit shall have two of scroll compressors and be able to operate even in case that one
of compressors is out of order. The compressor shall be of highly efficient hermetic scroll
type and equipped with invertor control capable of changing the speed in accordance to the
cooling or heating load requirement.

3. The condenser coil shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum
fins (with anti corrosion coating supplied, applied and warranted by the unit supplier for
seaside application) to form a cross fin coil. The coil is pressure tested under water to 30
bars during manufacturing and fully dehydrated The condenser fan shall be centrifugal type
with variable speed and directly driven by electric induction motor. The motor shall be
weather protected.

4. In the refrigerant piping, all safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safety operation of
the system including high pressure switch, over load relay, invertor overload protector and
fusible plugs.

5. Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation with long
refrigerant piping.

D. Controls:

1. A multi-functional centralized remote controller shall be able to control the complete system
and the zone thermostat shall control the following functions.

a) Temperature setting for each zone, or group of indoor unit.

b) ON / OFF as a zone or individual unit.
c) Indication of operation condition.
d) Select one of 10 operation modes for each zone.

SECTION 15784 – UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONING UNIT 3/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

3.1 INSTALLATION.

A. Install in accordance with manufacturers' installation instructions.

B. Provide shut-off valves in condenser water inlet and outlet piping (water cooled).

C. Pipe drain pan condensate to nearest floor drain. condensate drainage system.

D. Supply units fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 15784 – UNITARY AIR-CONDITIONING UNIT 4/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15810

DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes metal ductwork, nonmetallic ductwork, casing and plenums, buried ductwork,
kitchen hood ductwork, duct cleaning.

B Related Sections:

1. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for Weld priming, weather
resistant, paint or coating specified by this section.

2. Section 15060 – Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for hangers, supports and
sleeves for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A ASTM A90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.

B ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

C ASTM A366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality.

D ASTM A568 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled.

E ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial
Quality.

F NFPA 90A (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.

G SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) - HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual.

H SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) - HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

I UL 181 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.

J. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A No variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is
permitted except by written permission.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, gages, sizes, welds, and configuration for all systems.

C Product Data: Submit data for duct materials.

D Samples: Submit two samples of typical shop fabricated duct fittings.

E Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and
leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

F Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures for glass fiber ducts.

G Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that all duct products meet or exceed specified requirements.

SECTION 15810 – DUCTS 1/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in
fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
flexible.

B Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented experience.

B Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers.

C Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.

1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.11 WARRANTY

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide one year manufacturer warranty for ducts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 DUCT MATERIALS

A Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality,
having G90 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90.

B Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type 316.

C Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

D Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously
threaded.

2.3 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

SECTION 15810 – DUCTS 2/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating
pressures indicated.

B Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where
not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where
acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

C Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum
30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

D Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90-degree
conical tee connections may be used.

E. Exposed ducts used in indoor for the supply and return of air-conditioning air shall be factory pre-
insulated ducts complete with pre-insulated matching fittings and accessories. The duct shall be
double wall constructed from solid galvanized sheets for the inner and outer shells. The inner shell
shall be as per SMACNA recommendations. While the outer shell, shall be as per manufacturer
recommendations and finished to the ID approval. The pre-insulation material shall have the same
thermal properties as those specified in Section 15080 and shall comply with NFPA 90A. The duct
shall be supplied in flanged sections. Air tight gaskets shall be installed between matching flanges.

F. Fresh air kitchen hood duct and exhaust ducts used for other than parking exhaust, kitchen hood
and smoke extract shall be constructed of galvanized sheet metal as per SMACNA and as
described in item A above

G. Smoke extract ducts shall be fire rated, constructed of minimum of 1.2mm thick galvanized steel
sheets with necessary duct reinforcement to prevent duct from deforming during fire. Portion of
duct passing through another fire zone shall be provided with extra UL listed fire retardant painting
or fire cladding to achieve the fire rating corresponding to that of the fire zone. The fire rated
wrapping material shall comply with NFPA 92A and shall be applied in double thickness as that
recommended by the manufacturer and to the NFPA requirements. The duct shall be made air tight
with two hours fire rated UL listed sealant. Exhaust duct shall comply with the requirements of
SMACNA, NFPA and local civil defense.

H. Grease Kitchen Hood exhaust duct shall be construct of 1.5mm thick black steel sheet with
continuous longitudinal welded joints. All joints shall be air and water tight. Transverse joints shall
be angle flanged type with temperature rated air tight gaskets. The duct shall be provided with 10
gauges steel (3.5mm) access door at each change of direction. Valved drain pockets shall be
provided at the base of each vertical change in direction of the duct. Horizontal duct runs shall be
pitched towards the drain pockets and toward the inlet opening.

I. Non-grease kitchen hood exhaust duct shall be constructed of galvanized sheet metal as per
SMACNA and as described in item A above.

2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil.

1. Pressure Rating: 2.0 kPa positive or negative.

2. Maximum Velocity: 25.4 m/sec.

3. Temperature Range: -73 degrees C to 224 degrees C.

2.5 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil; fiberglass insulation; [aluminized] vapor barrier
film.

1. Pressure Rating: 2.0 kPa positive or negative.

2. Maximum Velocity: 25.4 m/sec.

3. Temperature Range: -28 degrees C to 121 degrees C.

2.6 CASINGS

A Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible and construct for operating pressures indicated.

SECTION 15810 – DUCTS 3/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

B Mount floor mounted casings on 100mm high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 200 mm
centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of 1.20 mm galvanized
expanded metal mesh supported at 300 mm centers, turned up 300 mm at sides with sheet metal
shields.

C Reinforce access door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting
angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for
cleaning and inspection.

D Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 1.50 mm back facing and 0.80
mm perforated front facing with 2.4mm diameter holes on 4 mm centers. Construct panels 75 mm
thick packed with 72 kg/cu m minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 1.50 mm.

2.7 KITCHEN HOOD

A Kitchen Hood Construction and Ventilation System shall be in accordance with the NFPA-96 and
SMACNA.

B Construct of 1.09 mm stainless steel, using continuous external welded joints.

C. Kitchen Hoods shall be double skin with 80% make up air from outside air.

D. Hood shall be provided with automatic fire protection and clean agent fire extinguishing system, UL
listed.

1. All kitchen hoods shall be equipped with dry powder type sprinkler system, complete with
all cylinder and accessories as required by UPC and recommended by manufacturer,
cylinder size, number of sprinkler and pipe size shall be as per UPC and as recommended
by manufacturer.

2. Once the system is activated, the pressurized dry chemical extinguishing agent cylinder
expels pyro-chem non-corrosive sodium bicarbonate through a pre-engineered piping
network and out of the discharged nozzles. The dry chemical discharged pattern is
maintained for appropriate duration of time to ensure extinguishments and inhibit re-
ignition.

3. ODOR Control:

If odor abatement is to be included, the filter Section housing shall be extended for the
incorporation of odor control means immediately following the third filter stage. This
means shall include:

a. Odor Neutralization. Provide a unit-mounted Odor Spray

Cabinet housing one or two 5 gallon (19 liter) reservoirs of carroll’s liquid environ
safe MT Odor Eliminator, a liquid spray compressor, one or more spray nozzles,
and fuse-protected circuitry with spray and delay period adjustable timers, all
inter connected to implement a neutralizer-rich environment between the third
stage filter and the fire damper, to break down organic odor molecules.

b. Equip the Odor Spray Cabinet with the “HS” heater option for
use in environments that fall below 32oF (0oC).

c. Odor Absorption / Adsorption: Provide a single pass, or a

double pass, V-bank array of 2” (51mm) deep 22-gauge perforated steel trays
containing Activated Car bon for absorption / adsorption of the odor molecules in
the passing air stream.

4. Blower Section:

Blower Section to be included where required to over come the total pressurization. The
blower shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certification Seal, and be UL/ULC listed.

5. Fire Protection System:

The unit to be protected by an approved automatic Fire Suppression System, as per

NFPA Bulletin 96, installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2.8 PANTRY HOOD

SECTION 15810 – DUCTS 4/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Pantry Hood shall consist of an exhaust fan designed for use with cooking equipment, a
kitchen hood and related accessories.

1. Hood shall be constructed of 18 gauge Type 304 stainless steel. The assembly at joints
and seams on the hood shall be liquid tight. The exposed external welds shall be ground
down, smoothed and highly polished.

2. Lights shall be UL listed for commercial cooking hoods, surface mounted incandescent
fixture, factory prewired to junction box on top of hood.

3. Grease extractor shall be 50 mm depth UL classified and sized to properly entrain grease
contaminants.

4. Hood to be constructed to contain removeable and cleanable oil grease filters.

5. Exhaust fan shall be supplied by the manufacturer and incorporated in the hood.

6. Three speed fan switch and ON/OFF switches for the fan and the lights shall be provided
on the hood.

B. Exposed ducts shall be stainless steel, hidden exhaust ducts shall be black steel 0.6mm thick with
welded joints insulated with metal cladding, hidden fresh air duct shall be galvanized steel. Hidden
duct shall be installed with 40mm thick soft fiber glass 24 kg/m3 with aluminum jacketing 0.60mm
thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible.

B During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to
prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

C Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

D Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

E Set plenum doors 150 to 300 mm above floor. Arrange door swing so that fan static pressure holds
door in closed position.

F Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with provisions for
clean out.

3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.

Provide Pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with
spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated
ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

B Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 1.5 m maximum length of flexible
duct held in place with strap or clamp.

C Connect terminal units to supply ducts with 1500 mm maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use
flexible duct to change direction.

3.4 CLEANING

SECTION 15810 – DUCTS 5/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

B Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To
obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that may be harmed by
excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15810 – DUCTS 6/6

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15820

DUCTS ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes back-draft dampers, combination fire-and-smoke dampers, duct access doors, fire
dampers, smoke dampers, volume control dampers, flexible duct connections and duct test holes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A NFPA 90A (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.

B SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) - HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

C UL 33 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.

D UL 555 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.

E UL 555S (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control
Systems.

F. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers, duct
access doors, and duct test holes.

C Product Data: Submit data for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers, duct
access doors, duct test holes and hardware used. Include electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.

D Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for Fire and Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers.

E Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access doors test holes.

C Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Perform Work in accordance with Public Work's standard.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

SECTION 15820 – DUCTS ACCESSORRIES 1/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.10 COORDINATION

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Coordinate Work where appropriate with building control Work.

1.11 WARRANTY

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide one year manufacturer warranty for duct accessories.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B Supply two of each size and type of fusible link.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A Product Description: Gravity Back-draft Dampers, Size 450 x 450 mm or Smaller, Furnished with
Air Moving Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction.

B Multi-Blade, back-draft dampers: Parallel-action, gravity-balanced, Galvanized 1.5 mm thick steel.

Blades, maximum 150 mm width, center pivoted, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges. Blades
linked together in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot
pin. Provide dampers with adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static
pressure.

2.3 FIRE DAMPERS

A. General: Labeled to UL 555.

B. Fire Rating: One and one-half and three hours.

C. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch-
(0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory installed galvanized, sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) thick as indicated, and length to suit application.

2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame
complies with sleeve requirements.

E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

F. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized steel blade
connectors.

G. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.

SECTION 15820 – DUCTS ACCESSORRIES 2/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

I. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated as indicated.

2.4 CEILING FIRE DAMPERS

A. General: Labeled to UL 555C; comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling
assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."

B. Frame: 0.040-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel; round or rectangular; style to suit
ceiling construction.

C. Blades: 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel with nonasbestos refractory
insulation.

D. Volume Adjustment: UL-labeled, fusible volume-control adjustment.

E. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated.

2.5 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,
and as indicated.

B Fabrication: Rigid and close fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening
locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum 25 mm thick insulation sandwitch metal
cover.

1. Less Than 300 mm square, secure with sash locks.

2. Up to 450 mm Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks.

3. Up to 600 x 1200 mm: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside
handles.

4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge.

5. Access panels with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. General: Labeled to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be labeled for one-and-
one-half-hour rating to UL 555.

B. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated as indicated.

C. Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel.

D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel; length to
suit wall or floor application.

E. Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two-position action.

1. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.

Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).

2. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to
make motors weatherproof.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size motor for
running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x
lbf (34 N x m).

4. Two-Position Motor: 230 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

5. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 230 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

SECTION 15820 – DUCTS ACCESSORRIES 3/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.7 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS.

A Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,
and as indicated.

B Splitter Dampers:

1. Material: Same gage as duct to 600 mm size in either direction, and two gages heavier for
sizes over 600 mm.

2. Blade: Fabricate of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous
hinge or rod.

3. Operator: Minimum 6 mm diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing
with set screw.

4. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 150 x 760 mm, 300 x 1220 mm.

C Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 200 x 1825
mm. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized frame channel with
suitable hardware.

D End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 300 mm and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple
blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. Provide closed end
bearings on all ducts having a pressure classification over 500Pa.

E Quadrants:

1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.

2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases, or

adapters.

3. Where rod lengths exceed 750 mm provide regulator at both ends.

2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,
and as indicated.

B Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric conforming to NFPA
90A, minimum density 1.0 kg/sq m.

2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 150 mm wide.

3. Metal: 75 mm wide, 0.6 mm thick galvanized steel.

2.9 DUCT TEST HOLES

A Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs,
threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

B Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide
extended neck fittings to clear insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation.

C Verify ducts and equipment installation are ready for accessories.

SECTION 15820 – DUCTS ACCESSORRIES 4/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3.2 INSTALLATION.

A Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15810 for duct construction and pressure class.

B Provide back-draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.

C Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic
dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated.
Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ductwork in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 200
x 200 mm size for hand access, 450 x 450 mm size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide
100 x 100 mm for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.

D Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

E Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers at locations indicated on contract
drawings. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections,
corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

F Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A Demonstrate the re-setting of fire dampers to the Client’s Representative/Engineer.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15820 – DUCTS ACCESSORRIES 5/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15825

DUCTS SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL:

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The work under this section consists of furnishings, installations, testing and commissioning
the ductwork specialties items as shown on the drawings and specified below.

B. RELATED SECTIONS.

1. Section 15050 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.

2. Section 15810 - Ductwork: Connections to silencers.
3. Section 15820 - Ductwork Accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES.

A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance.

B. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating.
C. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
D. AMCA 302 - Application of Sound Loudness Ratings for Non-Ducted Air Moving Devices.
E. AMCA 303 - Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for Ducted Air Moving Devices
Recommended Typical dBa Calculation.
F. ANSI S1.1 - Acoustical Terminology (Including Mechanical Shock and Vibration).
G. ANSI S1.8 - Preferred Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels.
H. ANSI S1.13 - Methods for Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels.
I. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
J. ARI 575 - Measuring Machinery Sound Within Equipment Rooms.
K. ASA 16 (ANSI S1.36) - Survey Methods for Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise
Sources.
L. ASA 47 (ANSI S1.4) - Specification for Sound Level Meters.
M. ASA 49 (ANSI S12.1) - Preparation of Standard Procedures to Determine the Noise Emission
from Sources.
N. ASHRAE 68 - Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure for Fans.
O. ASHRAE Handbook - Systems Volume, Chapter "Sound and Vibration Control".
P. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission of Building
Partitions.
Q. ASTM E477 - Method of Testing Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers for
Acoustical and Airflow Performance.
R. ASTM E596 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Noise Reduction of Sound Isolating
Enclosures.
S. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Measuring Sound and Vibration.
T. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

U. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or
equivalent authorities.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Submittals and Report: Conform to ANSI S1.1.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain sound level of spaces at levels specified on drawings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, materials, thicknesses, dimensional data, pressure losses,
acoustical performance, layout, and connection details.
C. Product Data: Provide catalog information indicating, materials, dimensional data, pressure
losses, and acoustical performance.
D. Design Data: Provide engineering calculations, referenced to specifications and AMCA 302,
AMCA 303 and ARI 270 standards indicating that maximum room sound levels are not
exceeded.

SECTION 15825 – DUCTS SPECIALTIES 1/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

E. Test Reports: Indicate acoustic housings meet or exceed specified sound transmission loss
values.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements which maintain
integrity of sound isolation.
G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 15050.
H. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate installation is complete and in accordance with
instructions.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 – SUBMITTALS.

B. Record actual locations of cross-talk silencers, acoustic housings and ductwork lagging.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with AMCA 300, ANSI S1.13, ARI 575, ASA 16, ANSI S1.36
standards and recommendations of ASHRAE 68.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section

with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Design application of duct silencers and acoustic housings under direct supervision of a
Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work.

1.9 WARRANTY.

A. Provide one year manufacture warranty effective from substantial completion of all equipment
and products supplied.

1.10 GUARANTEE.

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the full installation for one year from substantial completion.

B. The guarantee shall cover materials and labour for the complete system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only.
Contractor may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer
for the approval of the Engineer.

2.2 SOUND ATTENUATORS

A. Description: Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill material, and
inner casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar construction.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible.

B. Configuration:

1. Tubular with inner casing and liner, with absorptive aerodynamically shaped center body
with nose cone and truncated tail cone, splitters with radiused nose and contoured tails,
diameter as indicated, length to achieve the required sound levels.

2. Rectangular with lined splitters with radiused nose and contoured tails, modular.

C. Materials:

1. Outer Casing: Minimum 20 gage (0.9 mm) thick galvanized steel stiffened as
required, with mastic filled lock formed seams, 2 inch (50 mm) long, 11 gage (2.9 mm)
slip joints on both ends.

2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 24 gage (0.6 mm) thick perforated galvanized steel.

SECTION 15825 – DUCTS SPECIALTIES 2/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 4 lb/cu ft (64 kg/cu m) density.

4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting. 1 mil (0.0254 mm) mylar film.

D. Rating: Should achieve the required noise level at or below the specified pressure drop.

2.3 ACOUSTIC HOUSINGS

A. Description: Modular panels, including access doors and windows, nominal 4 inches (100 mm)
thick, with filled outer and inner casing. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

B. Materials:

1. Outer Casing: Minimum 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick galvanized steel stiffened as required,
with mastic filled lock formed welded seams

2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 22 gage (0.8 mm) thick perforated galvanized steel.

3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum density of 4 lb/cu ft (64 kg/cu m) density.

4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.. 1 mil (0.0254 mm) mylar film.

5. Window: Double glazed with 1/4 inch (6 mm) safety glass sized to drawings.

C. Rating: ASTM E90 sound transmission loss as specified on drawings.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL LOUVERS

A. Configuration: Louvers with blades on 45 degree slope; sound absorbing fill material, and inner
surface of perforated sheet metal, heavy channel frame, birdscreen.

B. Materials:

1. Louvers: 12 gage (2.50 mm) extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory baked
enamel or color anodized finish. Color to Architect approval.

2. Inner Surface: Minimum 24 gage (0.6 mm) thick perforated galvanized steel.

3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 4 lb/cu ft (64 kg/cu m) density.

4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting. 1 mil (0.0254 mm) mylar film.

5. Insect Screen: 1/4 inch 6 mm) square wire mesh.

6. Mounting: Exterior angle flange Screw holes in jambs. Masonry strap anchors.

C. Rating: Sound attenuations and pressure drop as shown on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Support duct silencers independent of ductwork with flexible duct connections on inlet and
outlet.

C. Install cross-talk silencers in wall. Calk wall penetrations; refer to Section 07900 – Joint Sealer.

D. Attach ductwork to acoustic louvers with flexible duct connections.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start systems in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Inspect installation periodically as recommended by the manufacturer or as directed by the

Engineer.

SECTION 15825 – DUCTS SPECIALTIES 3/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

C. Provide services of testing agency to take noise measurement. Use meters meeting
requirements of ASA 47 (ANSI S1.4).

D. After start-up, final corrections and balancing of systems take octave band sound
measurements over full audio frequency range in areas adjacent to mechanical equipment
rooms, duct and pipe shafts, and other critical locations, as directed.

E. Provide one-third octave band measurements of artificial sound sources in areas indicated as
having critical requirements.

F. Submit complete report of test results including sound curves.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15825 – DUCTS SPECIALTIES 4/4

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15830

FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes roof exhausts, wall exhausts, ceiling exhaust fans, inline centrifugal fans, axial
fans, propeller fans, motors, drives and accessories. All motors shall be UL listed.

B Related Sections:

1. Section 15070 – Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control: Product requirements
for resilient mountings and snubbers for fans for placement by this section.

2. Section 15080 – Mechanical Insulation: Product requirements for power ventilators for
placement by this section.

3. Section 15810 - Ducts: Product requirements for hangers for placement by this section.

4. Section 15820 - Duct Accessories: Product requirements for Back-draft Dampers for
placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A AMCA 99 (Air Movement and Control Association) - Standards Handbook.

B AMCA 210 (Air Movement and Control Association) - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for
Rating.

C AMCA 300 (Air Movement and Control Association) - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing
of Fans.

D AMCA 301 (Air Movement and Control Association) - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings
from Laboratory Test Data.

E NEMA MG1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Motors and Generators.

F UL 705 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Power Ventilators.

G. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Shop Drawings: Indicate size and configuration of fan assembly, mountings, weights, ductwork and
accessory connections.

C Product Data: Submit data on all fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating
point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity,
and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D Test Reports: Indicate performance data for adjustable axial fan blades for at least five blade
settings, including maximum.

E Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit fan manufacturers instructions.

F Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

SECTION 15830 – FANS 1/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

B Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement,
spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented experience.

B Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.

1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and
fan has been test run under observation.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.10 WARRANTY

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide five years manufacturer warranty for fans.

1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Maintenance service.

B Provide service and maintenance of fans for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B Supply two sets of belts for each fan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A Performance

1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating
Seal.

3. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.

SECTION 15830 – FANS 2/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

4. Performance Base: Sea level conditions.

5. Temperature Limit: Maximum (150 degrees C).

6. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.

B Wheel and inlet

1. Backward Inclined: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate,
backward curved blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast iron hub riveted
to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.

2. Forward Curved: Galvanized steel construction with inlet flange, back plate, shallow
blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically secured to
flange and back plate; steel hub swaged to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screw.

3. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate die
formed hollow airfoil shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange, and back plate; cast
iron [or cast steel] hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.

4. Radial: Steel construction with inlet flange, plate blades welded or riveted to back plate;
cast iron hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.

C Housing

1. Steel, spot welded for AMCA 99 Class I and II fans, and continuously welded for Class III,
braced, designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cut-off.

2. Factory finish before assembly to manufacturer's standard. For fans handling air
downstream of humidifiers, fabricate of galvanized steel.

3. Provide bolted construction with horizontal flanged split housing.

4. Fabricate plug fans without volute housing, in lined steel cabinet.

D Bearings and sleeves

1. Bearings: pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated [ball bearings, with ABMA 9 L-
10 life at 50,000 hours.

2. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key way, protectively coated with
lubricating oil, and shaft guard.

3. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and
adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 11.2 Kw and under, selected so required rpm is
obtained with sheaves set at mid-position. Fixed sheave for 15 Kw and over, matched
belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate
rating of the motor.

4. Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA Standard; 2.6 mm thick, 20 mm diamond mesh wire
screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan
supports without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt
tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.

E Accessories

1. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with fixed cantilevered inlet guide vanes welded to
inlet bell.

2. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with blades supported at both ends with two
permanently lubricated bearings, variable mechanism terminating in single control lever
with control shaft for double width fans.

3. Discharge Dampers: Opposed blade steel damper assembly with blades constructed of
two plates formed around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with
blades linked out of air stream to single control lever.

4. Inlet/Outlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid.

5. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick opening latches and gaskets.

SECTION 15830 – FANS 3/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

6. Scroll Drain: 13 mm steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll.

2.3 UP-BLAST ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUSTER (KITCHEN HOOD):

A. Up-blast exhaust fans shall be centrifugal type suitable for roof-mounting. Housing shall
incorporate exterior wind bands to enable velocity to discharge exhaust. Aluminum impeller shall
be spark-proof and of the non-overloading type. Housing shall be of mill finish spun aluminum
construction. Fans shall be of sizes and capacities as shown of drawings and shall be equipped
with grease through, disconnect switch and bird screen.

2.4 FILTERED MAKE-UP AIR FAN (SUPPLY FANS):

A. Roof-mounted, filtered makeup air units shall have belt driven double width/double inlet, forward
curved centrifugal type supply fans. The entire fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on a
formed, reinforced support structure with vibration isolators to prevent noise transmission. Motors
shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty, ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load
and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. The fans shaft shall be ground and
polished steel mounted in heavy duty, sealed ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a
minimum (L50) life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speeds. Pulleys
shall be of the fully machine cat iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor
shafts. Motor sheaves shall be adjustable for final system balancing. Drives shall be sized for a
minimum of 150% of driven horsepower.

Fan wheels shall be of the forward curved type, constructed of heavy gauge steel and statically
and dynamically balanced to ensure smooth, vibration free operation. Housing construction
shall be of heavy gauge galvanized steel with removable panels. Filters shall be one inch
aluminum mesh and sized to provide for optimum removal of contaminated outside air without
exceeding the manufacturers recommendations for maximum velocity.

The prewired control center shall include, but not be limited to, an integral master disconnect
switch with fuse blocks for main power connection, magnetic motor starters with starters with
thermal overloads and manual reset, fused 115 volt control strip for control wiring connection. All
electrical components shall be U.L. Labeled where applicable and wired in compliance with the
National Electrical Code (NFPA #70) Wiring shall be complete requiring only one point field
connection for power service and one point field connection for control voltage. Fans shall be
type and capacity as shown on drawings.

2.5 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS (DUCT MOUNTED TYPE):

A. Duct mounted supply, exhaust or return fans shall be of the centrifugal belt driven in-line type.
The fan housing shall be of the square design constructed of heavy galvanized steel and shall
include square duct mounting collars. Fan construction shall include two removable access panels
located perpendicular to the motor mounting panel. The access panels must of sufficient size to
permit easy access to all interior components.

The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include
a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be
statically and dynamically balanced. Motors shall be heavy duty bearing type, carefully matched to
the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall
mounted out of the airstream. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance.

Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow
block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L50) life in excess of 200,000
hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% o
driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely
attached to the wheel and motor shaft.

Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. A NEMA-1 Disconnect Switch shall
be provided as standard, except with explosion resistant motors, where disconnect are
optional. Factory wiring shall be provided from motor to the handy box.

All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air performance. Each fan
shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer’s nameplate containing the model number and
individual serial number for future identification. Fans shall be of type and capacity as shown on the
drawings.

B. In-line fans used to handle hot fire smoke shall be of the following specifications: (Smoke Extract
Fan)

SECTION 15830 – FANS 4/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Fan designed specially for smoke and hot gases extraction, UL – listed and FM approved
rated for temperature of 400°C for 2 hours.

2. Fan casing constructed of hot dipped galvanized steel plate for long life and high
resistance corrosion.

3. Cast in aluminum silicon alloy impeller with fixed pitch aerofoil blade to ensure strength
and reliability at the elevated temperatures.

4. Direct driven fan with motor housed within its own compartment, isolating it from the air
stream.

5. Motor totally enclosed fan cooled, Class F, insulation with motor protection to IP54

2.6 PROPELLER FANS

A Construction.

1. Impeller: Shaped steel or steel reinforced aluminum blade with heavy hubs, statically and
dynamically balanced, locked to shaft, directly connected to motor.

2. Frame: One piece, square steel with die formed venturi orifice, mounting flanges and
supports, with baked enamel finish.

B Accessories:

1. Back-draft Damper: Multiple blade with offset hinge pin, blades linked.

2. Outlet Damper: Multiple blade with offset hinge pin, blades linked, line voltage motor drive,
power open, spring return.

3. Safety Screens: Expanded galvanized metal over inlet, motor, and drive; to comply with
OSHA regulations.

4. Hood: Weather shield, to exclude rain and snow.

5. Controller: Solid-state speed controller.

2.7 ROOF EXHAUSTERS

A. Product Requirements:

1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210.

2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 300.
3. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
4. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance
with UL 705 and to NFPA 90A.

B. Fan Unit: Ventilators spun aluminum housing, non-overloading backward inclined wheel and
positive motor cooling direct or V-belt driven spun aluminum housing with curb cover. Aluminum
wheel and galvanized steel frame for side or up-blast discharge, roof or wall installation.

C. Kitchen Hood Exhaust: Similar to above, but shall meet NFPA 96, with heat baffle to protect
motor compartment and goose tray and trap.

D Accessories

1. Roof Curb: 300mm high. self-flashing, and factory installed nailer strip.

2. Disconnect Switch: Factory-wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected

motor and wall mounted multiple speed switch.

3. Back-draft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged
with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked and line voltage motor drive, power
open, spring return.

4. Birdscreen constructed in galvanized wiremesh to be installed on all exhaust fans, except

up-blast fans to be supplied with bird guard of rigid wire.

SECTION 15830 – FANS 5/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

6. Speed controller shall be installed on all direct drive fans and as specified on drawings.
7.

2.8 WALL EXHAUSTERS

A Construction

1. Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with spun aluminum housing; resiliently mounted motor;
13 mm mesh, 1.6 mm thick aluminum wire bird screen.

2. Sheaves: For V-belt drives, provide cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit
shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is
obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball
bearings.

B Accessories

1. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected
motor and wall mounted solid state speed controller.

2. Back-draft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged
with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked and line voltage motor drive.

3. Birdscreen constructed in galvanized wiremesh to be installed on all exhaust fans, except

up-blast fans to be supplied with bird guard of rigid wire.

4. Speed controller shall be installed on all direct drive fans and as specified on drawings.

2.9 SOUND LEVEL.

A. Unless shown otherwise the room loudness level shall be as follows:

Zones DBA

1.3-4 32-48 Royal Bedroom Suite

Private homes (rural and suburban)

1.7-5 36-51 Royal Areas and Conference Rooms.

2.6 38-53 Hotel rooms, libraries, movie theaters, executive offices.

2.5-8 41-58 Schools and classrooms, hospital wards and operating

rooms.

3-9 44-60 Court Rooms, museums, apartment houses, private

homes (urban).

4-12 48-64 Restaurants, lobbies, general open offices, banks.

5-15 51-67 Corridors and halls, cocktail lounges, washrooms and

toilets.

7-21 51-72 Hotel kitchens and laundries, supermarkets and hotel

back of house.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION.

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Secure roof wall exhausters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb structure.

C. Extend ducts to roof wall exhausters into roof curb Counterflash duct to roof wall opening.

D. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are
parallel with minimum one inch (25 mm) flex between ductwork and fan while running - see details.

SECTION 15830 – FANS 6/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

E. Provide sheaves required for final air balance.

F. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof and wall exhausters.

G. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated.

H. Where required, install acoustic insulation on fan suction or housing except for kitchen hood.

I. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and
fan has been test run under observation.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15830 – FANS 7/7

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15850

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes diffusers, registers/grilles, door grilles, louvers, roof hoods, goosenecks.

B Related Sections:

1. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Execution and product requirements for Painting of
ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A ADC 1062 (Air Diffusion Council) - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.

B AMCA 500 (Air Movement and Control Association) - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and
Shutters.

C ASHRAE 70 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers) - Method
of Testing for Rating the Airflow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.

D SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) - HVAC Duct
Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

E. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Product Data: Submit data outlets and inlets sizes, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission.
Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.

C Samples: Submit one of each required air outlet and inlet type.

D Test Reports: Rating of air outlet and inlet performance.

E Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented, experience, and with service facilities within 50km of Project.

1.6 MOCK-UP

A Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Mock-up requirements.

B Provide typical interior ceiling module with supply and return air outlets.

C Locate where directed.

D Mock-up may be part of general ceiling mock-up.

E Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

SECTION 15850 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 1/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.8 WARRANTY

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B Provide five years manufacturer warranty for air outlets and inlets.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B Supply 2% extra Air outlets and inlets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL : Manufacturer’s names mentioned in the Contract Documents is for reference only. Contractor
may submit equivalent products from other reputable international or local manufacturer for the approval of
the Engineer.

2.2 ROUND CEILING DIFFUSERS

A Product Description: Type: Round, adjustable pattern, stamped or spun, multi-core diffuser to
discharge air in 360 degree pattern, with sector baffles where indicated. Diffuser collar not more
than 25 mm above ceiling. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster ring and ceiling plaque.

B Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish to be selected.

C Accessories: Radial opposed-blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper
adjustable from diffuser face.

2.3 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS

A Type: Square and rectangular, adjustable pattern, multi-louvered diffuser to discharge air in one
way, two-way, three-way, four-way pattern with sector baffles where indicated.

B Frame: Surface mount or Snap-in or Inverted T-bar or Spline type as required. In plaster ceilings,
provide plaster frame and ceiling frame.

C Fabrication: Aluminum with baked enamel finish to be selected.

D Accessories: Radial opposed-blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper
adjustable from diffuser face.

2.4 CEILING SLOT DIFFUSERS

A Type: Continuous 13, 19, 25, mm wide slot, one, two, three, four, slots wide, with adjustable vanes
for left, right or vertical discharge ; integral ceiling fire damper as shown on the drawings.

B Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory, finish, color to be selected.

C Frame: 32mm margin with concealed or support clips for suspension system or support clips for T
bar mounting and gasket end cap.

D Plenum: Integral, galvanized steel, insulated or non-insulated as required.

2.5 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES

A Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille,
one-way or two-way deflection.

B Frame: 32mm margin with countersunk screw or concealed mounting and gasket.

C Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory finish, color to be selected.

SECTION 15850 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 2/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

D Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed-blade type with removable key operator, operable from
face.

2.6 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A Type: Streamlined blades, 19mm minimum depth, 19mm maximum spacing, with blades set at 45
degrees, vertical or horizontal face.

B Frame: 32mm margin with countersunk screw or concealed mounting.

C Fabrication: aluminum extrusions, with factory finish, color as selected.

D Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from
face where not individually connected to exhaust fans.

2.7 CEILING LINEAR EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES

A Type: Streamlined blades with 90 degree one-way or two-way deflection, 3.2 x 19 mm on 6mm
centers.

B Frame: 32mm margin, with countersunk screw or concealed mounting.

C Fabrication: aluminum extrusions, with factory finish, color to be selected.

D Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from
face.

2.8 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES

A Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 19mm minimum depth, 19mm maximum
spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical or horizontal face, single or double
deflection.

B Frame: 32mm margin with countersunk screw or concealed mounting and gasket.

C Fabrication: aluminum extrusions, with factory finish, color to be selected.

D Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from
face.

2.9 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES

A Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille
with one-way or two-way deflection.

B Frame: 32mm margin with countersunk screw or concealed mounting and gasket.

C Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory finish, color to be selected.

D Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from
face.

2.10 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A Type: Streamlined blades, 19mm minimum depth, 19mm maximum spacing, with spring or other
device to set blades, vertical or horizontal face.

B Frame: 32mm margin with countersunk screw or concealed mounting.

C Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions, with factory finish, color to be selected.

D Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed-blade type with removable key operator, operable from
face.

2.11 LINEAR WALL REGISTERS/GRILLES

A Type: Streamlined blades with 15 degree deflection, 3.2 x 19 mm on 6mm centers.

B Frame: 32mm margin with countersunk screw or concealed mounting and gasket.

SECTION 15850 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 3/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

C Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions, with factory finish, color to be selected.

D Damper: Integral gang-operated opposed blade damper with removable key operator, operable
from face.

2.12 NON VISION DOOR AND PARTITIONS GRILLES

A Non vision and light proof grille extruded aluminium section comprising a front section with inverted
section horizontal blades, borders countersink for screw fixing.

B Type core only, single flange or double flange, as required.

2.13 LOUVERS

A Type: 150mm deep with blades on 45 degree slope, heavy channel frame, bird screen with 13 mm
square mesh for exhaust and 19 mm for intake.

B Fabrication: 2.5mm thick extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory finish, color to be
selected.

C Mounting: Furnish with interior or exterior flat flange for installation.

2.14 ROOF HOODS

A Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible.

B Fabricate of reinforced galvanized steel, minimum 1.50mm base and 0.90 mm hood. Provide
removable hood; bird screen with 13mm square mesh for exhaust and 19 mm for intake, and
factory finish.

C Mount unit on minimum 300 mm high curb base with insulation between duct and curb.

D Make hood outlet area minimum of twice throat area.

2.15 GOOSENECKS

A Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, of
minimum 1.20 mm galvanized steel.

B Mount on minimum 300 mm high curb base where size exceeds 230 x 230 mm.

C All Fresh air Goosenecks shall be double skin and with 1” fiber glass insulation.

D All fresh air goosenecks shall be provided with 0.5” washable aluminum air filter.

E Provide aluminum bird screen with 13mm square mesh for exhaust and 19mm for intake.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Verify inlet/outlet locations.

C Verify ceiling and wall systems are ready for installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.

B Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.

C Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09900.

3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

SECTION 15850 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 4/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15850 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 5/5

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15930

CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

Control System

A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing all the controls and
instrumentation for the ventilating and air conditioning system and Electro-Mechanical Services as
indicated on drawings and as specified herein.

B. The Control System shall consist of modular electronic components.

C. The design, selection and supply of the system shall be from a recognized specialist Manufacturer
and/or his accredited agent in Saudi Arabia. The Manufacturer will be required to maintain
adequate stocks of equipment, spares and technical support facilities in Saudi Arabia.

D. The Contractor shall execute the works related to the automatic Control System in full compliance
with the project working drawings supplied by his specialist control Manufacturer (after approval by
the Engineer) and shall utilize the supervision services of the Manufacturer at the time of
installation to ensure the correct utilization of the equipment.

E. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience approved by manufacturer.

F. The automatic Control System shall be commissioned by a specially trained and authorized
Engineer of the specialist control Manufacturer. A detail commissioning report shall be prepared
and issued by the Manufacturer for the approval of the Engineer.

G. Unless specified otherwise, provide fully proportional components. Contractor may propose Direct
Digital Control (DDC) for the review and approval of the Engineer.

H. HVAC System requiring Reheat for Dehumidification shall be provided with DDC Based Control
System to satisfy the Control Sequence requirements.

I. Provide adequate spare parts and maintenance products for easy and rapid maintenance of any
faults.

J. Supply one of each type of instrument.

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers:

ASHRAE HVAC Systems and Applications Handbook, 1987 Chapter 31 - Automatic Control.

B. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association:

90A Standards for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

C. NEMA - National American Manufacturer's Association

D. The factory assembled major equipments shall be UL listed or certified from CE, TÜV or equivalent
authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Contractor shall submit all material submittals, drawings and manufacturer's
instructions/data to the Engineer for approval.

B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's technical product data for each control device and cubicle
furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics,
finishes of materials, including installation and start-up instructions.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 1 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

C. Design Data and Control Sequences: Contractor shall submit technical proposal for the Control
Sequence and Control Components to fulfill all the requirements shown on the Control Sequence
Drawings and to achieve the required Sequence of Operation of the HVAC and Mechanical Equipments.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each electric Control System. Provide Control System
diagrams and drawings, wiring diagrams, including a detailed description of operation sequences
together with all the engineering data related to the component.

E. Samples: Submit one of each instrument.

F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. A schematic diagram
for each system shall be provided in a wall mounted glass frame.

G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. All the Control System Components of shall be provided in manufacturer’s original new and
unopened packing bearing manufacturer’s name and label.

B. Store materials, not in actual use, in covered and well-ventilated area and protect them from dirt,
dust, moisture, direct sunlight and extreme temperatures.

C. For further requirements follow manufacturer’s written instructions regarding storage and handling.

1.5 WARRANTY :

A. All components, software, parts and assemblies supplied by the Control System manufacturer shall
be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for one year from acceptance date.

B. Labor to trouble-shoot, repair, program or replace system components shall be furnished by the
Control System contractor at no extra charge to the owner during the warranty period.

C. All corrective modifications and testing commissioning made during warranty service periods shall
be by the Contractor / Suppliers’ expense without any cost to the Client.

1.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS & INSTALLERS

A. TAC AB

B. LANDIS AND GYR

C. HONEYWELL

D. JOHNSON CONTROLS

E. STAFA CONTROLS

F. Or approved equal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEP CONTROLLERS:

Step controllers of heating and cooling equipment shall operate sequencing control up to 10 stages.

2.2 PROPORTIONAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS:

Proportional temperature controllers shall provide modulating control of liquid or air temperature in ducts,
tanks and similar applications.

2.3 CONTROL DEVICES

A. Motorized control dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as follows:

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 2 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade type as below or as scheduled on drawings.

a. Outdoor and/or return air mixing dampers shall be parallel blade, arranged to direct airstreams
toward each other.

b. Other modulating dampers shall be opposed blade type.

c. Two-position shutoff dampers may be parallel or opposed blade type with blade and side
seals.

2. Damper frames shall be 13 gauge galvanized steel channel or 1/8 extruded aluminum with
reinforced corner bracing.

3. Damper blades shall not exceed 8” in width or 48" in length. Blades are to be suitable for medium
velocity performance 2,000 fpm. Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.

4. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application, Oilite or better.

5. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with replaceable butyl rubber or
neoprene seals. Side seals shall be spring-loaded stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for
a maximum leakage rate of 10 cfm per sq. ft. at 4" w.c. differential pressure. Provide airfoil blades
suitable for a wide-open face velocity of 1,500 fpm.

6. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60n. Provide a minimum of one damper
actuator per section.

7. Modulating dampers shall provide a linear flow characteristic where possible.

8. Dampers shall have exposed linkages. Dampers over 48" in applications where sectioning is not
applicable shall be supplied with a jackshaft to provide sufficient force throughout the intended
operating range.

B. Electric damper/valve actuators

1. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to
the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.

2. Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical spring-return

mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.

3. All rotary spring-return actuators shall be capable of clockwise or counter-clockwise spring-return

operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.

4. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA control signal and provide a 2 to

10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA operating range.

5. All 24 VAC/VDC + 10% ---- -20%, 60Hz actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring and shall not
require more than 10 VA for AC or more than 8 W for DC applications. Actuators operating on 120
VAC or 230 VAC shall not require more than 11 VA.

6. All non-spring-return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual
positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring-return actuators with more than
7 N.m [60 in-lb.] torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.

7. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the reversing of direction of
rotation.

8. Actuators shall be provided with a raceway fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shall be
pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical connections.

9. Actuators shall be provided with 3 – position control signal and have a minimum stem force of 200
N. The Contractor have to submit verification calculation for stem forces for approval.

10. Actuators shall be UL Standard 873 Listed as meeting correct safety requirements and recognized
industry standards.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 3 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

11. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full-stroke cycles at the actuator's rated
torque.

C. Control Valves

1. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or modulating service as shown.

2. Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to provide the
following minimum close-off pressure ratings:

a. Water Valves:

1) Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head.

2) Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or

100% of total system (pump) head.

b. Steam Valves: 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.

3. Water Valves:

a. Body and trim style and materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design
conditions-and service shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating service.

b. Sizing Criteria:

1) Two-position service: Line size, unless otherwise shown.

2) Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop shall be equal to twice the pressure drop
through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between supply and
return mains, or 5 psi, whichever is greater.

3) Three-way modulating service: Pressure drop equal to twice the pressure drop
through the coil exchanger (load), 35 kPa [5 psi] maximum.

4) Valves ½” through 2” shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250,
spring-loaded, Teflon packing, quick opening for two-position service. Two-way
valves to have replaceable composition disc, or stainless steel ball with stainless steel
stem.

5) 2 ½” valves and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with guided plug and Teflon
packing, unless otherwise shown.

c. Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as scheduled on plans, or as follows:

1) Water zone valves – normally opened preferred.

2) Heating coils in air handlers – normally open.

3) Chilled water control valves – normally closed.

4) Other applications – as scheduled or as required by sequences of operation and

approved by the Engineer.

4. Steam Valves:

a. Body and trim materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design conditions
and service. Linear ports for modulating service.

b. Sizing Criteria:

1) Two-position service: pressure drop 10% to 20% of inlet psig.

2) Modulating service: 100 kPa [15 psig] or less: pressure drop 80% of inlet psig.

3) Modulating service: 101 to 350 kPa [16 to 50 psig]: pressure drop 50% of inlet psig.

4) Modulating service: over 350 kPa [50 psig]; pressure drop as scheduled on plans.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 4 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

5. Butterfly Valves:

The valve bodies shall be constructed of GG220 cast steel and suitable for 6 bar operation. The
butterfly and spindle shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall be equipped with double 0-
ring Teflon seals.

6. Butterfly Valve Motors:

The control motor for butterfly valves shall be of the maintenance-free reversible synchronous
motor and reduction gear box type. The motor shall be equipped with appropriate valve linkage
with manual override facilities and indication of vale position. The coupling mechanism shall be
equipped with a pretensioned which shall wind up the last 10 degrees of valve closing to eliminate
backlash and minimize fluttering. Auxiliary switches shall be provided for interlock functions to
denote open and closed position.

7. Two Port Valves (15-50 mm)):

The valve shall be of the externally threaded design (DIN 22950) with flat seals for eased of
installation and maintenance. The body shall be constructed form Rg5 gun metal with machined
seats; the spindle and plug shall be manufactured from stainless steel and equipped with double 0-
ring seals (replaceable without valve removal).

8. Two Port Valves (65-150 mm):

The valve shall be of the flanged type (BS 4505) with the body constructed from GG20 steel, the
plug manufactured from brass and the spindle from stainless steel equipped with double 0-ring
seals (replaceable without valve removal).

D. Temperature Sensing Devices

1. Low-voltage space thermostat shall be 24 V. bimetal-operated, snap action type, with either
adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set point adjustment, 13°C to 30°C [55°F to 85°F]
set point range, 1°C [2 ° F] maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.

2. Line-voltage space thermostat shall be bimetal-actuated, open contact or bimetal-actuated,

enclosed, snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listed for
electrical rating, concealed set –point.

3. Low-limit thermostats: Low-limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element 6 m [20
ft] minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any 30 cm {1 ft}
section. The low-limit thermostat shall be manual (automatic) reset only.

. 4. Unit Control Module :

Control unit for integration into air conditioning units such as induction, fan coil units etc. with
separate NTC temperature sensor 0-+40 Deg.C.

Connection for 3-core room bus for communication with as TEC Outstation and power supply.
Connections for return air sensor, occupancy switch and window contact. Setpoint knob for +/-
setpoint correction up to +/- 5K which can be reduced to zero through the software. Two trial
outputs for heating-cooling sequence control. Each output is capable of parallel operation of up to
four valve or damper actuators with synchronous motors.

E. Temperature sensors.

1. Temperature measurement shall be by transmitters with embedded Resistance Temperature

Device (RTD) or simple thermistor based sensors.

2. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of 1.5 m
[5 feet] in length.

3. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel, or copper well. Pressure
rating of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.

4. Space sensors shall be equipped with set point adjustment, override switch, display, and/or
communication port as shown.

5. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement.

F. Humidity sensors.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 5 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 5% to 95%.

2. Duct sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber.

3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 95% RH. They shall be suitable
for ambient conditions of -40°C to 75°C [-40°F to 170° F].

4. Humidity sensor's drift shall not exceed 3% of full scale per year.

G. Flow switches.

1. Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type, as shown.

2. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty
rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

3. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot
duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for
intended application, or as specified.

H. Relays.

1. Control relays shall be UL Listed plug-in type. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage
suitable for application.

2. Time delay relays shall be UL Listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delay shall
be adjustable ±200% (minimum) from set point shown on plans. Contact rating, configuration, and
coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure when not installed in local control
panels

I. Override timers.

1. Override timers shall be spring-wound line voltage UL Listed, contact rating and configuration as
required by application. Provide 0-to-6 hour calibrated dial unless otherwise specified; suitable for
flush mounting on control panel face, located on local control panels or where shown.

J. Current transmitters.

1. AC current transmitters shall be self-powered combination split-core current transformer type with
built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4 to 20 mA two-wire output. Unit ranges shall be
10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, and 200 A full scale, internal zero and span adjustment and ±1%
full-scale accuracy at 500 ohm maximum burden.

2. Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA Recognized.

3. Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.

K. Current Transformers.

1. AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA Recognized and completely encased (except for
terminals) in approved plastic material.

2. Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected for ±1% accuracy at
5A full scale output.

3. Transformers shall be fixed-core or split-core type for installation on new or existing wiring,
respectively.

L. Voltage transmitters.

1. AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single loop (two-wire) type, 4 to 20 mA output with
zero and span adjustment.

2. Ranges shall include 200 to 130 VAC, 200 to 250 VAC, 250 to 330 VAC, and 400 to 600 VAC
full-scale, adjustable, with ±1% full-scale accuracy with 500 ohm maximum burden.

3. Transmitters shall be UL/CSA Recognized at 600 VAC rating and meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1
requirements.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 6 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

M. Voltage transformers

1. AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA Recognized, 600 VAC rated.

2. Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4 to 55°C [40 to 130°F1 and shall
provide ±0.5% accuracy at 24 VAC and a 5 VA load.

3. Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic material.

N. Power monitors.

1. Power monitors shall be three-phase type furnished with three-phase disconnect/shorting switch
assembly, UL Listed voltage transformers and UL Listed split-core current transformers.

2. Shall provide a selectable rate pulse output for kWh reading and a 4 to 20 mA output for kW
reading. Shall operate with 5 A current inputs with a maximum error of ±2% at 1.0 power factor or
±2.5% at 0.5 power factor.

O. Current switches.

1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current. The
switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements of the
Control system.

P. Pressure transducers.

1. Transducer shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field adjustable.

2. Transducer sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions of positive or

negative pressure 50% greater than calibrated span without damage.

3. Water pressure transducer shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of 150
psi minimum. Transducer shall be complete with 4 to 20 mA output, required mounting brackets,
and block and bleed valves.

4. Water differential pressure transducer shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof
pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (differential pressure) and maximum static pressure
shall be 300 psi. Transducer shall be complete with 4 to 20 mA output, required mounting brackets,
and five-valve manifold.

Q. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty
rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 4 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended
application, or as shown.

R. Pressure-electric (PE Switches)

1. Shall be metal or neoprene diaphragm actuated, operating pressure rated 0-175 kPa [0-25 psig],
with calibrated scale set point range of 14-125 kPa [2-18 psig] minimum, UL listed.

2. Provide ones or two-stage switch action SPOT, DPST, or DPDT, as required by application.
Electrically rated for pilot duty service (125 VA minimum), and/or for motor control.

3. Shall be open type (panel-mounted) or enclosed type for remote installation. Enclosed type shall be
NEMA 1 unless otherwise specified.

4. Shall have a permanent indicating gauge on each pneumatic signal line to PE switches.

S. Electro-pneumatic (E/P) transducers.

1. Electronic/pneumatic transducer shall provide a proportional 20 to 100 kPa [3 to 15 psig] output

signal from either a 4 to 20 mA or 0 to VDC analog control input.

2. E/P transducer shall be equipped with the following features:

a. Span and zero adjustments.

b. Manual output adjustments.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 7 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

c. Pressure gauge assembly.

d. Feedback loop control.

e. Air consumption of 0.05 L/s [0.1 scfm] at mid-range.

T. Local Control Panels

1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with [hinged door], key-lock
latch, removable sub-panels. A single key shall be common to all field panels and sub-panels.

2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices pre-wired with color-coded stranded
conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections
shall be UL Listed for 600 volt service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with
adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually
identified per control drawings.

3. Provide ON/OFF power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to each local
panel.

4. All control panels must be built in accordance with UL508A standards and be labeled with separate
UL label numbers.

5. The Contractor shall be required to submit details for the manufacturer as well as catalogues on all
items to be utilized in the assembly, prior to manufacturer. After assembly and satisfactory testing,
the Contractor shall be required to arrange for an inspection visit by the Engineer, prior to packing
and despatch from the factory.

6. Components mounted on the door of the control cubicle shall be identified by a label consisting of
white 3 mm high lettering on a black plastic background.

7. The panel identification label shall be white letter 10 mm high on a black plastic background.

8. All the control panel internal components shall be labeled noting the diagram, component,
reference number and the set point where applicable.

9. Control Panel Equipment: Each control panel shall be provided with the following components:

1. Door:
a. Door lock/isolator
b. Run and trip indicator lights
c. Rotary on/off standby switches
d. Temperature indicators

2. Internal:

a. Motor starters
b. Controllers
c. Transformers
d. Interface terminal strip
e. Wiring between internal control and interface terminal strip
f. Necessary contactors and relays
g. Interlocks

10. Cubicles: The cubicles shall be constructed from 1.5 mm cold rolled sheet steel, folded and spot
welded and finished in hammer epoxy powder paint. The cubicle shall be equipped with the
following features.

1. Removable 2 mm zinc bi-chromated sheet steel equipment back plate.

2. Detachable door equipped with concealed removable hinges of the type which permit 120°
opening.

3. Doors shall be equipped with earth terminals, polyamide double bar locks, sealing gasket,
and the handle shall be mechanically interlocked with a panel power isolator to disconnect
the power to panel when the door is opened.

4. Steel, sealed removable gland plates top and bottom of cubicle.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 8 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

5. Zinc bi-chromated steel wall mounting brackets.

11. Components: The panels components shall be current production models with adequate spares
availability and suitable for operation in the operational climatic conditions.

12. Indicator Lamps: The holders shall be robustly constructed and equipped with adequately
dimensioned screw terminals for wire connection. The lenses shall be of minimum 20 mm
diameter, easily replaceable in the event of damage or color change requirements and available in
a minimum of six colors. The bulbs shall be of the screw or bayonet fixing and of the incandescent
filament type to provide adequate illumination for daylight viewing at a distance of two meters.

13 Selector Switches: The switches shall be of the rotary cam, modular type. The rating shall be
adequate for the specified function with a minimum capacity of 10A.

14. Contactors and Relays: The construction of the contactors/relays shall comply with the standards
as laid down in BS 5424 or IEC 158-1 and shall have the following characteristics:

a. Coil markings clearly visible from front.

b. Suitable for DIN rail mounting.

c. Equipped with one normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contacts as standard.

d. Extra auxiliary contacts easily added (minimum three).

15 Overloads: The construction of the terminal overloads shall comply with the standards as laid
down on BS 4941 or IEC-292-1 and have the following characteristics:

a Single phase protection.

b. Manual or automatic trip re-set.

c. Temperature compensation.

d. Volt-free separate normally open and normally closed signal contacts.

16. Starters: All motor starter shall be in accordance with the relevant codes and shall be direct-on-line
type for motors up to 7.5 HP and start delta or assisted start for larger motors.

17. Wiring:

a The internal wiring of the panel shall be routed in grey plastic molded channel with slotted
sides and snap-on lid. The cable density shall not exceed 80 percent of the available
volume to permit ease of cable tracing and wiring modifications.

b. The cable shall be of the color coded flexible single core variety complying to the following
schedule:

--------------------------------------------------
FUNCTION COLORS SIZE (mm2)
--------------------------------------------------

L1 POWER RED 2.5 min.

L2 POWER YELLOW 2.5 min.
L3 POWER BLUE 2.5 min.
N POWER BLACK 2.5 min.
PHASE CONTROL PINK 1.5 min.
PHASE NEUTRAL BLACK 1.5 min.
EARTH GREEN/YELLOW 1.5 min.
24V CONTROL LINE ORANGE 1.5 min.
24V CONTROL NEUTRAL GREY 1.5 min.
CONTROL DETECTOR WHITE 1.5 min.
CONTROL SIGNAL VIOLET 1.5 min.
--------------------------------------------------

c. All wiring interfacing with external connections shall do so via numbered DIN rail mounted
terminals of adequate dimensions for the designate purpose. All wirings shall be fitted with
numbered identifications to assist in tracing.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 9 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

18. Labeling: All field and panel mounted equipment shall be fitted with labels. These labels shall
carry the equipment control diagram reference numbers. In case of field mounted equipment the
label shall be permanently fixed to the piece of equipment or on the adjacent structure, subject to
the approval of the Engineer.

2.4 ELECTRICAL CONTROL POWER AND LOW VOLTAGE WIRING

A. Provide interlock wiring between supply and exhaust fans, electrical wiring for relays (including power feed)
for temperature and pressure indication. Provide interlock wiring between refrigeration machines, pumps
and condensing equipment as required for the specified sequence of operation and the refrigeration system
integral controller(s). Do not provide interlock wiring if a dedicated binary output has been specified for the
equipment or the sequence of operation requires independent start/stop.

B. Provide power wiring, conduit and connections for low temperature thermostats, high temperature
thermostats, alarms, flow switches, actuating devices for temperature, humidity, pressure and flow indication
and point resets.

C. Install all wiring raceway systems complying with the requirements of the National Electrical Code, Division
16 documents.

D. Network Communication Requirements

1. Wired network communication shall be via channels consisting of twisted pair installed in a 3/4”
EMT. Wire type and size shall meet LONWORKS® transceiver requirements.

2. Care shall be taken to route the cable as far from interference generating devices as possible.

3. When shielded wire is used, all shields shall be grounded (earth ground) at one point only, to
eliminate ground loops.

4. There shall be no power wiring, in excess of 30 VAC rms, run in conduit with communications
wiring. In cases where signal wiring is run in conduit with communication wiring, all communication
wiring and signal wiring shall be run using separate twisted shielded pairs (24 AWG) with the
shields grounded in accordance with the manufacturer’s wiring practices.

E. Input/Output Control Wiring

1. Sensor wiring shall be two-wire, three-wire, or four-wire twisted, shielded, minimum 22 gauge.

2. Other analog inputs shall be a minimum of number 22 gauge, twisted, shielded.

3. Binary control function wiring shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge.

4. Analog output control functions shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge, twisted, shielded.

5. Binary input wiring shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge.

6. Thermistors shall be equipped with the manufacturers calibrated lead wiring.

7. 120V control wiring shall be #14 THHN in minimum of 3/4” conduit. Provide 4 or 20% fill extra wire
in each conduit.

F. Splices: Splices in shielded cables shall consist of terminations and the use of shielded cable couplers
which maintain the integrity of the shielding. Terminations shall be in accessible locations. Cables shall be
harnessed with cable ties as specified herein.

G. Conduit and Fittings

1. Conduit for Control Wiring, Control Cable and Transmission Cable: Electrical metallic tubing (EMT)
with compression fittings, cold rolled steel, zinc coated or zinc-coated rigid steel with threaded
connections.

2. Outlet Boxes (Dry Location): Sheradized or galvanized drawn steel suited to each application, in
general, four inches square or octagon with suitable raised cover.

3. Outlet Boxes (Exposed to Weather): Threaded hub cast aluminum or iron boxes with gasket device
plate.

4. Pull and Junction Boxes: Size according to number, size, and position of entering raceway as
required by National Electrical Codes. Enclosure type shall be suited to location.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 10 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

5. See Division 16 specifications for conduit and fittings.

2.5 HVAC CONTROL HARDWARE IDENTIFICATION

A. Automatic Control Valve Tags

1. For valves, etc., use metal tags with a 2-inch minimum diameter, fabricated of brass, stainless
steel or aluminum. Attach tags with chain of same materials. For lubrication instructions, use linen
or heavy duty shipping tag.

2. Tag valves with identifying number and system.

3. Prepare lists of all tagged valves showing location, floor level, tag number, use. Prepare separate
lists for each system. Include copies in each maintenance manual.

B. Wire Tags

1. All multi-conductor cables in all pull boxes and terminal strip cabinets shall be tagged.

2. Provide wire Tags as per Division 16.

C. Conduit Tags: Provide tagging or labeling of conduit so that it is always readily observable which conduit
was installed or used in implementation of this Work.

D. Miscellaneous Equipment Identification

1. Screwed-on, engraved black lamicoid sheet with white lettering on all control panels and remote
processing panels. Lettering sizes subject to approval. Inscription, subject to review and
acceptance, indicating equipment, system numbers, functions and switches. For panel interior
wiring, input/output modules, local control panel device identification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are ready to receive work.

B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

C. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and
any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Engineer for resolution before
rough-in work is started.

D. The Contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as shown, and any
discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Engineer for resolution before rough-
in work is started.

E. The Contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of the work, and if
head room or space conditions appear inadequate or if any discrepancies occur between the plans
and his work and the plans for the work of others, he shall report such discrepancies to the
Engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes necessary to accommodate his work
with the work of others.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. Test and Balance

1. The contractor shall furnish all tools necessary to interface to the Control System for test and
balance purposes.

2. The contractor shall provide training in the use of these tools. This training will be planned for a
minimum of 4 hours.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 11 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3. In addition, the contractor shall provide a qualified technician to assist in the test and balance
process, until all terminal units are balanced.

i. Life Safety

1. Duct smoke detectors required for air handler shutdown are supplied under
Division 16. The contractor shall interlock smoke detectors to air handlers for
shutdown as described in Sequences of Operations.

2. Smoke dampers and actuators required for duct smoke isolation are provided
under Division 15. The contractor shall interlock these dampers to the air
handlers as described in Sequences of Operations.

3. Fire/Smoke dampers and actuators required for fire rated walls are provided
under Division 15.

ii. Coordination with controls specified in other sections or divisions. Other sections and/or
divisions of this specification include controls and control devices that are to be part of or
interfaced to the controls system specified in this section. These controls shall be
integrated into the system and coordinated by the Contractor.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install all control components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations
and provide necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and
operable system.

B. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration-free walls or free-standing angle
iron supports. Once cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipment room.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and engraved
lamicoid nameplates on cabinet face.

C. Install “hand/off/auto” selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in
“hand” position.

D. Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e., horizontal, vertical, and parallel
to walls) wherever possible.

E. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

F. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by Chapter 1, Article 100, Part A of the
NEC.

G. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.

H. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and
standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local
codes and standard practices.

I. The Control System shall be completely installed and ready for operation, as specified and shown,

J. Dielectric isolation shall be provided where dissimilar metals are used for connection and support.

K. Penetrations through and mounting holes in the building exteriors shall be made watertight. Holes in
concrete, brick, steel and wood walls shall be drilled or core drilled with proper equipment; conduits
installed through openings shall be sealed with materials which are compatible with existing
materials. Openings in fire/smoke partitions shall be sealed with materials which meet the
requirements of NFPA 70, FIRESTOPPING.

L. The Control System installation shall provide clearance for control-system maintenance by
maintaining access space between coils, access space to mixed-air plenums, and other access
space required to calibrate, remove, repair, or replace control-system devices. The control-system
installation shall not interfere with the clearance requirements for mechanical and electrical system
maintenance.

3.4 WIRING

A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with national and local electrical codes and Division 16
of this specification.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 12 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

B. All NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL Listed in approved raceway per NEC and Division
16 requirements.

C. All low voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. (Low voltage power circuits shall be
sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current limit.)

D. Where NEC Class 2 (current limited) wires are in concealed and accessible locations including
ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used, provided that cables are
UL Listed for the intended application.

E. All wiring in mechanical, electrical or service rooms - or where subject to mechanical damage -
shall be installed in raceway at levels below 10ft.

F. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing
high voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of
interfacing the two (e.g. relays and transformers).

G. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing.

H. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring is to be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to
it, and neatly tied at 10ft intervals.

I. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, they shall be supported from or anchored to
structural members. Cables shall not be supported by or anchored to ductwork, electrical raceways,
piping or ceiling suspension systems.

J. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal block or terminal strip in a control panel
or at a junction box.

K. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent
restriction to devices and terminals.

L. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120v. If only higher voltages are available,
the contractor shall provide step-down transformers.

M. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted between termination
points.

N. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all
penetrations.

O. Size of raceway and size and type of wire shall be the responsibility of the contractor, in keeping
with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC requirements, except as noted elsewhere.

P. Include one pull string in each raceway 1” or larger.

Q. Use coded conductors throughout.

R. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These enclosures
include packaged equipment control panel enclosures unless they also contain Class 1 starters.

S. Conceal all raceways, except within mechanical, electrical or service rooms. Install raceway to
maintain a minimum clearance of 6” from high temperature equipment (e.g. steam pipes or flues).

T. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to the structure and spaced according to code
requirements. Raceways and pull boxes may not be hung on flexible duct strap or tie rods.
Raceways may not be run on or attached to ductwork.

U. Adhere to Division 16 requirements where raceway crosses building expansion joints.

V. Install insulated bushings on all raceway ends and openings to enclosures. Seal top end of all
vertical raceways.

W. The contractor shall terminate all control and interlock wiring, and shall maintain updated wiring
diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.

X. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 3 ft in length and
shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal raceway less than 3/4" electrical trade size shall not

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 13 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

be used. In areas exposed to moisture - including chiller and boiler rooms - liquid-tight, flexible
metal raceways shall be used.

Y. Raceway must be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at both ends and left
clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections shall be joined with couplings (per code).
Terminations must be made with fittings at boxes, and ends not terminating in boxes shall have
bushings installed.

3.5 COMMUNICATION WIRING

A. The contractor shall adhere to the items listed for other low voltage wiring as listed in this section.

B. All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Follow manufacturers installation
recommendations for all communication cabling.

C. Do not install communication wiring in raceway and enclosures containing Class 1 power wiring.

D. Maximum pulling, tension and bend radius for cable installation as specified by the cable
manufacturer shall not be exceeded during the installation.

E. Contractor shall verify the integrity of the entire network following the cable installation. Use
appropriate test measures for each particular cable.

F. When a cable enters or exits a building, a lightning arrestor must be installed between the lines and
ground. The lightning arrestor shall be installed according to the manufacturers instructions.

G. All runs of communication wiring shall be unspliced length when that length is commercially
available.

H. All communication wiring shall be labeled to indicate origination and destination data.

I. Grounding of coaxial cable shall be in accordance with NEC regulations Article on Communication
Circuits, Cable and Protector Grounding.

3.6 SENSORS

A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the sensor operates.

C. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their raceways or in the wall to stop air
transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.

D. Sensors used in mixing plenums and where specified in the sequence of operations shall be of the
averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner vertically across duct.
Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.

E. Low limit sensors used in coil discharge shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally
across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip. Provide 1ft of sensing element for
each square ft of coil area.

F. All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature
sensors with heat-conducting fluid in thermal wells.

G. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall, complete with sun shield at designated
location.

H. Differential air static pressure

1. Supply duct static pressure: Pipe the high pressure tap to the duct using a pilot tube. Pipe the
low pressure port to a tee in the high pressure tap tubing of the corresponding building static
pressure sensor (if applicable) or to the location of the duct high pressure tap and leave open to
the plenum.

2. Return duct static pressure: Pipe the high pressure tap to the duct using a pilot tube. Pipe the
low pressure port to a tee in the low pressure tap tubing of the corresponding building static
pressure sensor.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 14 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3. Building static pressure: Pipe the low pressure port of the pressure sensor to the static pressure
port located on the outside of the building at roof level to serve as a common outdoor reference.
Pipe the high pressure port to a location behind a thermostat cover.

4. The piping to pressure ports on all pressure transducers shall contain a capped test port
located adjacent to the transducer.

5. All pressure transducers other than those controlling VAV boxes shall be located in field device
panels, not on the equipment monitored or on ductwork. Mount transducers in a location
accessible for service without the use of ladders or special equipment.

6. All air and water differential pressure sensors shall have gauge tees mounted adjacent to all
taps. Water gauges shall also have shutoff valves installed before the tee.

3.7 ACTUATORS

A. Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions.

1. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper

smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.

2. Provide all mounting hardware and linkages for actuator installation.

B. Electric/Electronic

1. Dampers: Actuators shall be direct-mounted on damper shaft or jackshaft unless shown as a

linkage installation. Actuators shall be mounted following manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Valves, Actuators shall be connected to valves with adapters approved by the actuator
manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following the actuator manufacturer's
recommendations.

3.8 CONTROLLERS

A. Provide a minimum of one separate controller for each AHU or other HVAC system. Multiple controllers
may control one system provided that all points associated with individual control loops are assigned to
the same controller. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are
exempt from this requirement.

Provide a minimum of 10% spare capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are
not universal, 10% of each type is required. If outputs are not universal, 10% of each type is required. A
minimum of one spare is required for each type of point used.

B. Provide spare capacity in control panels for future addition of the field device, field wiring and controllers.

3.9 COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY

A. Run refrigerated dryer and receiver drain piping to the nearest floor drain.

B. Hard wire refrigerated dryer power connections to junction box.

C. Main instrument air distribution shall be through high pressure air mains (tank pressure). Air mains shall be
extended to each temperature control panel or to groups of panels located in the same room. Minimum
line size shall be 0.375" od with a maximum allowable pressure drop, at design airflow, of 10 psig to the
farthest point. Provide final regulators at each point of use, with isolation valves and gauges for both high
pressure and regulated pressure.

D. Provide high pressure to equipment where required for performance specified herein.

3.10 AIR PIPING

A. Piping shall be concealed except in mechanical rooms.

B. Fasten copper tubing with copper clips at regular intervals and run parallel to building lines. Attach
concealed tubing above suspended ceilings to structure or ductwork supports. Bends shall be tool made.
Provide unions at final connections to apparatus. Provide separation between dissimilar metals.

C. Existing copper tubing may be reused at the Contractor's option. Main control air lines to new
connections, beginning at the existing air compressors, shall be cleaned with dry nitrogen for moisture

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 15 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

removal. Cleaning and reworking of control tubing shall be coordinated with building occupancy
requirements. Temporary compressors shall be installed to continue operation of systems where shutdown
cannot be scheduled.

D. Nonmetallic tubing run in mechanical rooms and concealed in inaccessible locations shall be run in
metallic raceways. Make connections to hot equipment (e.g. steam and hot water valves) with copper
tubing, minimum 12" length.

E. Tubing installed inside control panels and equipment enclosures, and above ceilings shall be tied and
supported.

3.11 AIR PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Install a gauge on each controlled device except room thermostats. Gauges may be mounted in or on the
control panel if the controlled device is within sight from the panel.

B. On positive positioning devices, provide gauges for both pilot input and actuator signals.

3.12 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Install dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to operate and to obtain leakage rates
specified herein. Adjust the damper linkage such that the damper closes before the actuator is fully closed
to assure tight shutoff of the damper

B. Blank-off and seal around dampers and between dampers and sleeves or frames to eliminate air bypass.

C. For outdoor air damper assemblies, stage the opening of each section to prevent stratification and poor
mixing of outside and return air.

D. Maximum damper area per motor: 15 square feet.

3.13 CONTROL VALVES

A. Install in an accessible location, with room for actuator removal and service. Adjust the actuator to provide
tight shutoff. Provide valve stem travel indicator and adjust to indicate proper travel. Where butterfly valves
are used, permanently mark the end of the valve shaft to indicate valve position. Provide high pressure air
if necessary for valve actuator.

3.14 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

A. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end within 2"
of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.

B. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served.

C. Identify control panels with minimum 1 cm letters on laminated plastic nameplates.

D. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents. All
plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does not remove the label.

E. Identify room sensors relating to terminal box or valves with nameplates.

3.15 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his work or workers, and shall be liable
for all damage thus caused.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for his work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and
accepted. The Contractor shall protect his work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material
and equipment received on-site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends
of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state,
and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section.

B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship.
All visible piping and/or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 16 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

C. Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the
work.

3.17 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING

A. Startup Testing: All testing listed in this article shall be performed by the Contractor and shall make up part
of the necessary verification of an operating Control System. This testing shall be completed before the
Owners Representative is notified of the system demonstration.

1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and test apparatus required to calibrate and prepare for service
of all instruments, controls, and accessory equipment furnished under this specification.

2. Verify that all control wiring is properly connected and free of all shorts and ground faults. Verify that
terminations are tight.

3. Enable the Control Systems and verify calibration of all control devices individually. Perform
calibration procedures per manufacturers' recommendations.

4. Verify that all control devices (relays, solenoid valves, two-position actuators and control valves,
magnetic starters, etc.) operate properly and that the normal positions are correct.

5. Verify that all control signals are properly functional, that start and span are correct, and that direction
and normal positions are correct. The Contractor shall check all control valves and automatic
dampers to ensure proper action and closure. The Contractor shall make any necessary adjustments
to valve stem and damper blade travel.

6. Verify that the system operation adheres to the approved Sequences of Operation. Simulate and
observe all modes of operation by overriding and varying inputs and schedules. Tune all devices and
optimum Start/Stop routines.

7. Alarms and Interlocks:

a. Check each alarm separately by including an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the
alarm.

b. Interlocks shall be tripped using field contacts to check the logic, as well as to ensure that the
fail-safe condition for all actuators is in the proper direction.

c. Interlock actions shall be tested by simulating alarm conditions to check the initiating value of
the variable and interlock action.

3.18 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Demonstration

1. The Represenative of Control System Supplier shall completely check out, calibrate and test all
connected hardware and software to insure that the system performs in accordance with the
approved specifications and approved sequences of operation submitted. All the tests shall be
witnessed by the Owners Representative.

2. Witnessed validation demonstration shall consists of :

- Running each specified report

- Display and demonstrate each data entry to show site specific customizing capability.
Demonstrate parameter changes.

- Demonstrate multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot and graphic construction

operating simultaneously via split screen.

- Demonstrate class programming with point options of beep duration, beep rate, alarm
archiving and color banding.

3.19 MANUALS: The following manuals shall be provided:

A. An Operators Manual with graphic explanations of functions.

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 17 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK - KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

B. Computerized printouts of all data file construction including all points processing assignments,
physical terminal relationships, scales and offsets, command and alarm limits, etc.

C. A data manual for the integrated Control System package with Control Component Data Sheet,
trouble shooting and O&M Instruction.

D. A manual including revised As Built documents of all materials required under the paragraph
“SUBMITTALS” of this specification.

E. Three Sets of Operator Manuals, two Programmers, and two As Built Manuals shall be provided to
the owner.

3.20 TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall supply personnel to train Client’s O&M personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the installed system. The training program shall be designed to provide a
comprehensive understanding of O&M of the system. It shall be sufficiently detailed to allow the
O&M personnel to operate the system independent of any outside assistance.

- 20 hours during normal day shift periods for system operators. Specific schedules shall be
established at the convenience of the customer.

- 10 hours of system training shall be provided to customer supervisory personnel so that

they are familiar with system operation.

- The specified training schedule shall be coordinated with the customer and will follow the
training outline submitted by the contractor as part of the submittal process.

B. All training shall be provided by the Control System Supplier / Manufacturer without extra cost and
shall utilize specified manuals, as-build documentation, and the on-line help utility.

- END OF SECTION -

SECTION 15930 – CONTROL SYSTEM 18 / 18

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15950

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing of air systems, testing, adjusting, and balancing
of hydronic refrigerating systems, measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems,
sound measurement of equipment operating conditions, vibration measurement of equipment
operating conditions.

B Related Sections:

1. Section 15950 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A ASHRAE 111 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers) -

Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation,
Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.

B NEBB : National Environmental Balancing Bureau

C SMACNA : Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors

National Association.

D NFPA : National Fire Protection Association.

E ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

F ASTM : American Society of Testing and Materials.

G Contractor may propose equivalent standards from CE, TÜV or equivalent authorities instead of US
based Standards required by this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B Test Reports: Indicate data on forms prepared following ASHRAE 111. Submit data in S.I. Metric
units.

C Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and
balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

D Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and
equipment data required.

E Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for
Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.

F Provide reports in binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover
identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment
identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.

G Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms prior to commencing system balance.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations balancing valves
and rough setting.

SECTION 15950 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 1/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Perform Work in accordance with ASHRAE 111.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A Agency: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.

B Perform Work under supervision of registered professional engineer experienced in performance of

this Work and licensed [at the place where the Project is located.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.

B Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A Section 01100 - Summary: Work sequence.

B Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion.

C. For control sequencing system refer to design drawings.

1.9 SCHEDULING

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of system with Fire Authority.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following
conditions:

1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.

2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.

3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.

4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final
filters.

5. Duct systems are clean of debris.

6. Fans are rotating correctly.

7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.

8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.

9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.

10. Air outlets are installed and connected.

11. Duct system leakage is minimized.

SECTION 15950 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 2/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

12. Pumps are rotating correctly.

13. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place or in normal position.

14. Service and balance valves are open.

C Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, which
prevent system balance.

3.2 PREPARATION

A Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments
available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 5 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space.
Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

C Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to
be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

D After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such
disruption has been rectified.

E Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors
to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

F At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas
as selected and witnessed by the Owner.

G Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.

3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area
of duct.

B Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

C Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts.

D Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as
dampers and splitters.

E Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes as
required to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

F Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

G Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops,
and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.

H Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design
conditions.

I Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check
leakage.

J Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.

SECTION 15950 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 3/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

K Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide
required relationship between each to maintain approximately (12.5 Pa) positive static pressure
near the building entries.

L Check multi-zone units for motorized damper leakage. Adjust air quantities with mixing dampers
set first for cooling, then heating, then modulating.

3.6 SCHEDULES

Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing shall be but not limited to following :

Electric Water Coolers

Plumbing Pumps
HVAC Pumps
Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers
Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units
Unit Air Conditioners
Air Coils
Fans
Air Filters
Air Terminal Units
Air Inlets and Outlets
Controls Compressor

A Report Forms

1. Title Page:

a) Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency

b) Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
c) Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
d) Project name
e) Project location
f) Project Architect
g) Project Engineer
h) Project Contractor
i) Project altitude
j) Report date

2. Summary Comments:

a) Design versus final performance

b) Notable characteristics of system
c) Description of systems operation sequence
d) Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building
pressurization
e) Nomenclature used throughout report
f) Test conditions

3. Instrument List:

a) Instrument
b) Manufacturer
c) Model number
d) Serial number
e) Range
f) Calibration date

4. Electric Motors:

a) Manufacturer
b) Model/Frame
c) HP/BHP and kW
d) Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
e) RPM
f) Service factor
g) Starter size, rating, heater elements
h) Sheave Make/Size/Bore

SECTION 15950 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 4/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

5. V-Belt Drive:

a) Identification/location
b) Required driven RPM
c) Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d) Belt, size and quantity
e) Motor sheave diameter and RPM
f) Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual

6. Pump Data:

a) Identification/number
b) Manufacturer
c) Size/model
d) Impeller
e) Service
f) Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
g) Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
h) Discharge pressure
i) Suction pressure
j) Total operating head pressure
k) Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
l) Shut off, total head pressure

7. Air Cooled Condenser:

a) Identification/number
b) Location
c) Manufacturer
d) Model number
e) Serial number
f) Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
g) Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
h) Number of compressors

8. Electric Duct Heater:

a) Manufacturer
b) Identification/number
c) Location
d) Model number
e) Design kW
f) Number of stages
g) Phase, voltage, amperage
h) Test voltage (each phase)
i) Test amperage (each phase)
j) Air flow, specified and actual
k) Temperature rise, specified and actual

9. Induction Unit Data:

a) Manufacturer
b) Identification/number
c) Location
d) Model number
e) Size
f) Design air flow
g) Design nozzle pressure drop
h) Final nozzle pressure drop
i) Final air flow

10. Air Moving Equipment

a) Location
b) Manufacturer
c) Model number
d) Serial number
e) Arrangement/Class/Discharge
f) Air flow, specified and actual
g) Return air flow, specified and actual

SECTION 15950 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 5/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

h) Outside air flow, specified and actual

i) Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
j) Inlet pressure
k) Discharge pressure
l) Sheave Make/Size/Bore
m) Number of Belts/Make/Size
n) Fan RPM

11. Return Air/Outside Air Data:

a) Identification/location
b) Design air flow
c) Actual air flow
d) Design return air flow
e) Actual return air flow
f) Design outside air flow
g) Actual outside air flow
h) Return air temperature
i) Outside air temperature
j) Required mixed air temperature
k) Actual mixed air temperature
l) Design outside/return air ratio
m) Actual outside/return air ratio

12. Exhaust Fan Data:

a) Location
b) Manufacturer
c) Model number
d) Serial number
e) Air flow, specified and actual
f) Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
g) Inlet pressure
h) Discharge pressure
i) Sheave Make/Size/Bore
j) Number of Belts/Make/Size
k) Fan RPM

13. Duct Traverse:

a) System zone/branch
b) Duct size
c) Area
d) Design velocity
e) Design air flow
f) Test velocity
g) Test air flow
h) Duct static pressure
i) Air temperature
j) Air correction factor

14. Duct Leak Test:

a) Description of ductwork under test

b) Duct design operating pressure
c) Duct design test static pressure
d) Duct capacity, air flow
e) Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
f) Test apparatus
1) Blower
2) Orifice, tube size
3) Orifice size
4) Calibrated
g) Test static pressure
h) Test orifice differential pressure
i) Leakage

15. Air Monitoring Station Data:

a) Identification/location

SECTION 15950 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 6/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

b) System
c) Size
d) Area
e) Design velocity
f) Design air flow
g) Test velocity
h) Test air flow

16. Flow Measuring Station:

a) Identification/number
b) Location
c) Size
d) Manufacturer
e) Model number
f) Serial number
g) Design Flow rate
h) Design pressure drop
i) Actual/final pressure drop
j) Actual/final flow rate
k) Station calibrated setting

17. Terminal Unit Data:

a) Manufacturer
b) Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct
c) Identification/number
d) Location
e) Model number
f) Size
g) Minimum static pressure
h) Minimum design air flow
i) Maximum design air flow
j) Maximum actual air flow
k) Inlet static pressure

18. Air Distribution Test Sheet:

a) Air terminal number

b) Room number/location
c) Terminal type
d) Terminal size
e) Area factor
f) Design velocity
g) Design air flow
h) Test (final) velocity
i) Test (final) air flow
j) Percent of design air flow

19. Sound Level Report:

a) Location
b) Octave bands - equipment off
c) Octave bands - equipment on
d) RC level – equipment on

20. Vibration Test:

a) Location of points:
1) Fan bearing, drive end
2) Fan bearing, opposite end
3) Motor bearing, center (if applicable)
4) Motor bearing, drive end
5) Motor bearing, opposite end
6) Casing (bottom or top)
7) Casing (side)
8) Duct after flexible connection (discharge)
9) Duct after flexible connection (suction)

b) Test readings:

SECTION 15950 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 7/8

JUFFALI INDUSTRIAL PARK – KAEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1) Horizontal, velocity and displacement

2) Vertical, velocity and displacement
3) Axial, velocity and displacement

c) Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration

d) Unusual conditions at time of test
e) Vibration source (if non-complying)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15950 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 8/8